Yamaha XT250XC Service manual

2008
SERVICE MANUAL
XT250X
XT250XC
LIT-11616-21-52
3C5-28197-10
EAS20050
XT250X
XT250XC
SERVICE MANUAL
©2008 by Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
First edition, August 2007
All rights reserved.
Any reproduction or unauthorized use
without the written permission of
Yamaha Motor Corporation, U.S.A.
is expressly prohibited.
Printed in U.S.A.
P/N LIT-11616-21-52
EAS20070
NOTICE
This manual was produced by the Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd. primarily for use by Yamaha dealers
and their qualified mechanics. It is not possible to include all the knowledge of a mechanic in one manual. Therefore, anyone who uses this book to perform maintenance and repairs on Yamaha vehicles
should have a basic understanding of mechanics and the techniques to repair these types of vehicles.
Repair and maintenance work attempted by anyone without this knowledge is likely to render the vehicle unsafe and unfit for use.
This model has been designed and manufactured to perform within certain specifications in regard to
performance and emissions. Proper service with the correct tools is necessary to ensure that the vehicle will operate as designed. If there is any question about a service procedure, it is imperative that you
contact a Yamaha dealer for any service information changes that apply to this model. This policy is
intended to provide the customer with the most satisfaction from his vehicle and to conform to federal
environmental quality objectives.
Yamaha Motor Company, Ltd. is continually striving to improve all of its models. Modifications and significant changes in specifications or procedures will be forwarded to all authorized Yamaha dealers and
will appear in future editions of this manual where applicable.
NOTE:
● This
Service Manual contains information regarding periodic maintenance to the emission control
system. Please read this material carefully.
● Designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.
EAS20080
IMPORTANT MANUAL INFORMATION
Particularly important information is distinguished in this manual by the following.
The Safety Alert Symbol means ATTENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS
INVOLVED!
WARNING
Failure to follow WARNING instructions could result in severe injury or death to the
vehicle operator, a bystander or a person checking or repairing the vehicle.
CAUTION:
A CAUTION indicates special precautions that must be taken to avoid damage to the
vehicle.
NOTE:
A NOTE provides key information to make procedures easier or clearer.
EAS20090
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
This manual is intended as a handy, easy-to-read reference book for the mechanic. Comprehensive
explanations of all installation, removal, disassembly, assembly, repair and check procedures are laid
out with the individual steps in sequential order.
● The manual is divided into chapters and each chapter is divided into sections. The current section title
is shown at the top of each page “1”.
● Sub-section titles appear in smaller print than the section title “2”.
● To help identify parts and clarify procedure steps, there are exploded diagrams at the start of each
removal and disassembly section “3”.
● Numbers are given in the order of the jobs in the exploded diagram. A number indicates a disassembly step “4”.
● Symbols indicate parts to be lubricated or replaced “5”.
Refer to “SYMBOLS”.
● A job instruction chart accompanies the exploded diagram, providing the order of jobs, names of
parts, notes in jobs, etc “6”.
● Jobs requiring more information (such as special tools and technical data) are described sequentially
“7”.
1
CLUTCH
CLUTCH
EAS25070
Removing the clutch
NOTE:
REMOVING THE CLUTCH
1. Straighten the lock washer tab.
2. Loosen:
Primary drive gear nut “1”
3
Measure the friction plate at four places.
Friction plate thickness
2.70—
2.90 mm (0.106—
0.114 in)
Wear limit
2.60 mm (0.1024 in)
NOTE:
Insert aluminum plate “a” between primary drive
gear “2” and primary driven gear “3”, and loosen
the primary drive gear nut.
T.
R.
3. Loosen:
Clutch boss nut “1”
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
14
4
NOTE:
3
4
2
7
8
1
(5)
While holding the clutch boss “1” with the universal clutch holder “2”, loosen the clutch boss nut.
12
16
13 New
6
17
Universal clutch holder
90890-04086
YM-91042
15
5
11
5
9
T.
R.
1
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATES
The following procedure applies to all of the
clutch plates.
1. Check:
Clutch plate
Damage
Replace the clutch plates as a
set.
2. Measure:
Clutch plate warpage
(with a surface plate and thickness gauge “1”)
Out of specification
Replace the clutch
plates as a set.
3
10 New
75 Nm (7.5 m • kg, 54 ft • Ib)
2
T.
R.
6
19
EAS25110
E
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Clutch spring
Pressure plate
Adjusting screw
Push plate
Friction plate
Clutch plate
Clutch damper spring
Clutch damper spring seat
Primary drive gear nut
Lock washer
Claw washer
Clutch boss nut
Lock washer
Clutch boss
Thrust washer
Clutch housing
Ball
Clutch push rod
Primary drive gear
80 Nm (8.0 m • kg, 58 ft • Ib)
Remarks
Warpage limit
0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
EAS25100
CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATES
The following procedure applies to all of the friction plates.
1. Check:
Friction plate
Damage/wear
Replace the friction plates
as a set.
2. Measure:
Friction plate thickness
Out of specification
Replace the friction
plates as a set.
5
1
1
1
6
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-31
7
18
5-33
EAS25140
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRINGS
The following procedure applies to all of the
clutch springs.
1. Check:
Clutch spring
Damage
Replace the clutch springs as a
set.
2. Measure:
2
EAS20100
SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this manual
for easier understanding.
NOTE:
The following symbols are not relevant to every
vehicle.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
T.
1
R.
9
10
E
11
G
12
M
13
BF
14
B
15
LS
16
M
17
S
18
LT
New
1. Serviceable with engine mounted
2. Filling fluid
3. Lubricant
4. Special tool
5. Tightening torque
6. Wear limit, clearance
7. Engine speed
8. Electrical data
9. Engine oil
10. Gear oil
11. Molybdenum-disulfide oil
12. Brake fluid
13. Wheel-bearing grease
14. Lithium-soap-based grease
15. Molybdenum-disulfide grease
16. Silicone grease
17. Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®)
18. Replace the part
EAS20110
TABLE OF CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION
1
SPECIFICATIONS
2
PERIODIC CHECKS AND
ADJUSTMENTS
3
CHASSIS
4
ENGINE
5
FUEL SYSTEM
6
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
7
TROUBLESHOOTING
8
GENERAL INFORMATION
IDENTIFICATION ...........................................................................................1-1
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER....................................................1-1
MODEL LABEL ........................................................................................1-1
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ........................................................................1-2
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY .........................1-2
REPLACEMENT PARTS .........................................................................1-2
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS ...................................................1-2
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER PINS....................................1-2
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS...................................................................1-2
CIRCLIPS.................................................................................................1-3
1
2
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS.................................................................1-4
SPECIAL TOOLS...........................................................................................1-5
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
IDENTIFICATION
EAS20130
IDENTIFICATION
EAS20140
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number “1” is stamped
into the right side of the steering head pipe.
1
EAS20150
MODEL LABEL
The model label “1” is affixed to the frame. This
information will be needed to order spare parts.
1
1-1
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
EAS20180
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
EAS20190
PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL AND
DISASSEMBLY
1. Before removal and disassembly, remove all
dirt, mud, dust and foreign material.
EAS20210
GASKETS, OIL SEALS AND O-RINGS
1. When overhauling the engine, replace all
gaskets, seals and O-rings. All gasket surfaces, oil seal lips and O-rings must be cleaned.
2. During reassembly, properly oil all mating
parts and bearings and lubricate the oil seal
lips with grease.
2. Use only the proper tools and cleaning equipment.
Refer to “SPECIAL TOOLS” on page 1-5.
3. When disassembling, always keep mated
parts together. This includes gears, cylinders, pistons and other parts that have been
“mated” through normal wear. Mated parts
must always be reused or replaced as an assembly.
EAS20220
LOCK WASHERS/PLATES AND COTTER
PINS
After removal, replace all lock washers/plates
“1” and cotter pins. After the bolt or nut has been
tightened to specification, bend the lock tabs
along a flat of the bolt or nut.
EAS20230
4. During disassembly, clean all of the parts and
place them in trays in the order of disassembly. This will speed up assembly and allow for
the correct installation of all parts.
5. Keep all parts away from any source of fire.
BEARINGS AND OIL SEALS
Install bearings and oil seals so that the manufacturer’s marks or numbers are visible. When
installing oil seals “1”, lubricate the oil seal lips
with a light coat of lithium-soap-based grease.
Oil bearings liberally when installing, if appropriate.
EAS20200
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use only genuine Yamaha parts for all replacements. Use oil and grease recommended by
Yamaha for all lubrication jobs. Other brands
may be similar in function and appearance, but
inferior in quality.
1-2
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
ECA13300
CAUTION:
Do not spin the bearing with compressed air
because this will damage the bearing surfaces.
EAS20240
CIRCLIPS
Before reassembly, check all circlips carefully
and replace damaged or distorted circlips. Always replace piston pin clips after one use.
When installing a circlip “1”, make sure the
sharp-edged corner “2” is positioned opposite
the thrust “3” that the circlip receives.
1-3
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
EAS20250
CHECKING THE CONNECTIONS
Pocket tester
90890-03132
Check the leads, couplers, and connectors for
stains, rust, moisture, etc.
1. Disconnect:
● Lead
● Coupler
● Connector
2. Check:
● Lead
● Coupler
● Connector
Moisture → Dry with an air blower.
Rust/stains → Connect and disconnect several times.
NOTE:
● If
there is no continuity, clean the terminals.
● When checking the wire harness, perform
steps (1) to (3).
● As a quick remedy, use a contact revitalizer
available at most part stores.
3. Check:
● All connections
Loose connection → Connect properly.
NOTE:
If the pin “1” on the terminal is flattened, bend it
up.
4. Connect:
● Lead
● Coupler
● Connector
NOTE:
Make sure all connections are tight.
5. Check:
● Continuity
(with the pocket tester)
1-4
SPECIAL TOOLS
EAS20260
SPECIAL TOOLS
The following special tools are necessary for complete and accurate tune-up and assembly. Use only
the appropriate special tools as this will help prevent damage caused by the use of inappropriate tools
or improvised techniques. Special tools, part numbers or both may differ depending on the country.
When placing an order, refer to the list provided below to avoid any mistakes.
NOTE:
For U.S.A. and Canada, use part number starting with “YM-”, “YU-”, or “ACC-”.
For others, use part number starting with “90890-”.
Tool name/Tool No.
Illustration
Reference
pages
Pocket tester
90890-03132
1-4, 3-7, 3-8,
5-52, 7-35,
7-36, 7-37,
7-40, 7-41,
7-42, 7-43,
7-44, 7-45, 7-47
Special thickness gauge
90890-01399
3-5
Tappet adjusting tool
90890-01311
Six piece tappet set
YM-A5970
3-6
Digital tachometer
90890-06760
YU-39951-B
3-7, 3-8, 3-11
Timing light
90890-03141
Inductive clamp timing light
YU-03141
3-11
Compression gauge
90890-03081
Engine compression tester
YU-33223
3-12
1-5
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool name/Tool No.
Illustration
Reference
pages
Steering nut wrench
90890-01403
Spanner wrench
YU-33975
3-23
Ring nut wrench
90890-01268
Spanner wrench
YU-01268
3-24, 4-49
Spoke wrench
90890-01522
3-27
Cylinder cup installer
90890-01996
4-22, 4-33
Damper rod holder
90890-01460
4-42, 4-44
T-handle
90890-01326
T-handle 3/8" drive 60 cm long
YM-01326
4-44
Fork seal driver weight
90890-01367
Replacement hammer
YM-A9409-7
4-44, 4-45
YM-A9409-7/YM-A5142-4
1-6
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool name/Tool No.
Illustration
Reference
pages
Fork seal driver attachment (ø35)
90890-01369
Replacement 35 mm
YM-A9409-5
4-44
Slide hammer bolt
90890-01083
Slide hammer bolt 6 mm
YU-01083-1
5-14
Weight
90890-01084
YU-01083-3
5-14
YU-01083-3
Valve spring compressor
90890-04019
YM-04019
5-18, 5-23
Valve guide remover (ø6)
90890-04064
Valve guide remover (6.0 mm)
YM-04064-A
5-20
Valve guide installer (ø6)
90890-04065
Valve guide installer (6.0 mm)
YM-04065-A
5-20
Valve guide reamer (ø6)
90890-04066
Valve guide reamer (6.0 mm)
YM-04066
5-20
1-7
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool name/Tool No.
Illustration
Reference
pages
Universal clutch holder
90890-04086
YM-91042
5-33, 5-35
Sheave holder
90890-01701
Primary clutch holder
YS-01880-A
5-47, 5-48
Flywheel puller
90890-01362
Heavy duty puller
YU-33270-B
5-47
Yamaha bond No. 1215 (Three Bond
No.1215®)
90890-85505
5-56
Crankcase separating tool
90890-01135
Crankcase separator
YU-01135-B
5-59
1-8
SPECIAL TOOLS
Tool name/Tool No.
Illustration
Crankshaft installer pot
90890-01274
Installing pot
YU-90058
Reference
pages
5-60
YU-90058/YU-90059
Crankshaft installer bolt
90890-01275
Bolt
YU-90060
5-60
Adapter (M10)
90890-01383
Adapter #2
YU-90062
5-60
Spacer
90890-01288
5-60
Ignition checker
90890-06754
Opama pet-4000 spark checker
YM-34487
7-43
Digital circuit tester
90890-03174
Model 88 Multimeter with tachometer
YU-A1927
7-46
1-9
SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................2-1
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS...........................................................................2-2
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS.........................................................................2-9
1
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................2-11
TIGHTENING TORQUES...............................................................................2-13
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS..........................2-13
ENGINE TIGHTENING TORQUES..........................................................2-13
CHASSIS TIGHTENING TORQUES........................................................2-15
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES .....................................2-18
ENGINE....................................................................................................2-18
CHASSIS..................................................................................................2-19
LUBRICATION SYSTEM CHART AND DIAGRAMS ....................................2-21
ENGINE OIL LUBRICATION CHART ......................................................2-21
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS .....................................................................2-23
CABLE ROUTING..........................................................................................2-25
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
EAS20280
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Model
Model
3C58 (U49)
3C59 (CAL)
Dimensions
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Seat height
Wheelbase
Ground clearance
Minimum turning radius
2150 mm (84.6 in)
805 mm (31.7 in)
1160 mm (45.7 in)
810 mm (31.9 in)
1360 mm (53.5 in)
285 mm (11.22 in)
1900 mm (74.8 in)
Weight
With oil and fuel
Maximum load
132.0 kg (291 lb)
160.0 kg (353 lb)
2-1
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
EAS20290
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Engine type
Displacement
Cylinder arrangement
Bore × stroke
Compression ratio
Starting system
Air cooled 4-stroke, SOHC
249.0 cm3
Forward-inclined single cylinder
74.0 × 58.0 mm (2.91 × 2.28 in)
9.50 :1
Electric starter
Fuel
Recommended fuel
Fuel tank capacity
Unleaded gasoline only
9.1 L (2.40 US gal) (2.00 Imp.gal) (CAL)
9.8 L (2.59 US gal) (2.16 Imp.gal) (U49)
1.9 L (0.50 US gal) (0.42 Imp.gal)
Fuel reserve amount
Engine oil
Lubrication system
Type
Recommended engine oil grade
Wet sump
YAMALUBE 4, SAE10W30 or SAE20W40
API service SG type or higher, JASO standard
MA
Engine oil quantity
Total amount
Without oil filter element replacement
With oil filter element replacement
Oil filter type
1.40 L (1.48 US qt) (1.23 Imp.qt)
1.20 L (1.27 US qt) (1.06 Imp.qt)
1.30 L (1.37 US qt) (1.14 Imp.qt)
Paper
Oil pump
Oil pump type
Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance
Limit
Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing clearance
Limit
Oil-pump-housing-to-inner-and-outer-rotor clearance
Limit
Pressure check location
Trochoid
0.150 mm (0.0059 in)
0.200 mm (0.0079 in)
0.100–0.151 mm (0.0039–0.0059 in)
0.221 mm (0.0087 in)
0.04–0.09 mm (0.0016–0.0035 in)
0.16 mm (0.0063 in)
HEAD CYLINDER
Spark plug (s)
Manufacturer/model
Spark plug gap
NGK/DR7EA
0.6–0.7 mm (0.024–0.028 in)
Cylinder head
Volume
Warpage limit
20.50–21.50 cm3 (1.25–1.31 cu.in)
0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
Camshaft
Drive system
Camshaft journal diameter
Chain drive (right)
25.021–25.039 mm (0.9851–0.9858 in)
2-2
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Camshaft lobe dimensions
Intake A
Limit
Intake B
Limit
Exhaust A
Limit
Exhaust B
Limit
36.520–36.620 mm (1.4378–1.4417 in)
36.460 mm (1.4354 in)
30.201–30.301 mm (1.1890–1.1930 in)
30.151 mm (1.1870 in)
36.564–36.664 mm (1.4395–1.4435 in)
36.514 mm (1.4376 in)
30.216–30.316 mm (1.1896–1.1935 in)
30.166 mm (1.1876 in)
A
B
Camshaft runout limit
0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
Timing chain
Model/number of links
Tensioning system
DID SCR-0404 SV/104
Automatic
Rocker arm/rocker arm shaft
Rocker arm inside diameter
Limit
Rocker arm shaft outside diameter
Limit
Rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft clearance
12.000–12.018 mm (0.4724–0.4731 in)
12.036 mm (0.4739 in)
11.981–11.991 mm (0.4717–0.4721 in)
11.950 mm (0.4705 in)
0.009–0.037 mm (0.0004–0.0015 in)
Valve, valve seat, valve guide
Valve clearance (cold)
Intake
Exhaust
Valve dimensions
Valve head diameter A (intake)
Valve head diameter A (exhaust)
0.05–0.10 mm (0.0020–0.0039 in)
0.10–0.15 mm (0.0039–0.0059 in)
33.90–34.10 mm (1.3346–1.3425 in)
28.40–28.60 mm (1.1181–1.1260 in)
A
Valve face width B (intake)
Valve face width B (exhaust)
2.260 mm (0.0890 in)
2.260 mm (0.0890 in)
B
Valve seat width C (intake)
Valve seat width C (exhaust)
0.90–1.10 mm (0.0354–0.0433 in)
0.90–1.10 mm (0.0354–0.0433 in)
2-3
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
C
Valve margin thickness D (intake)
Valve margin thickness D (exhaust)
0.80–1.20 mm (0.0315–0.0472 in)
0.80–1.20 mm (0.0315–0.0472 in)
D
Valve stem diameter (intake)
Limit
Valve stem diameter (exhaust)
Limit
Valve guide inside diameter (intake)
Limit
Valve guide inside diameter (exhaust)
Limit
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance (intake)
Limit
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance (exhaust)
Limit
Valve stem runout
5.975–5.990 mm (0.2352–0.2358 in)
5.950 mm (0.2343 in)
5.960–5.975 mm (0.2346–0.2352 in)
5.935 mm (0.2337 in)
6.000–6.012 mm (0.2362–0.2367 in)
6.042 mm (0.2379 in)
6.000–6.012 mm (0.2362–0.2367 in)
6.042 mm (0.2379 in)
0.010–0.037 mm (0.0004–0.0015 in)
0.080 mm (0.0032 in)
0.025–0.052 mm (0.0010–0.0020 in)
0.100 mm (0.0039 in)
0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
Cylinder head valve seat width (intake)
Limit
Cylinder head valve seat width (exhaust)
Limit
0.90–1.10 mm (0.0354–0.0433 in)
1.7 mm (0.07 in)
0.90–1.10 mm (0.0354–0.0433 in)
1.7 mm (0.07 in)
Valve spring
Inner spring
Free length (intake)
Limit
Free length (exhaust)
Limit
Installed length (intake)
Installed length (exhaust)
Spring rate K1 (intake)
Spring rate K2 (intake)
Spring rate K1 (exhaust)
Spring rate K2 (exhaust)
Installed compression spring force (intake)
Installed compression spring force (exhaust)
Spring tilt (intake)
Spring tilt (exhaust)
2-4
36.17 mm (1.42 in)
34.47 mm (1.36 in)
36.17 mm (1.42 in)
34.47 mm (1.36 in)
30.50 mm (1.20 in)
30.50 mm (1.20 in)
14.70 N/mm (83.94 lb/in) (1.50 kgf/mm)
19.00 N/mm (108.49 lb/in) (1.94 kgf/mm)
14.70 N/mm (83.94 lb/in) (1.50 kgf/mm)
19.00 N/mm (108.49 lb/in) (1.94 kgf/mm)
75.00–91.70 N (16.86–20.61 lbf) (7.65–9.35 kgf)
75.00–91.70 N (16.86–20.61 lbf) (7.65–9.35 kgf)
2.5 °/1.6 mm
2.5 °/1.6 mm
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Winding direction (intake)
Winding direction (exhaust)
Outer spring
Free length (intake)
Limit
Free length (exhaust)
Limit
Installed length (intake)
Installed length (exhaust)
Spring rate K1 (intake)
Spring rate K2 (intake)
Spring rate K1 (exhaust)
Spring rate K2 (exhaust)
Installed compression spring force (intake)
Counter clockwise
Counter clockwise
Spring tilt (intake)
Spring tilt (exhaust)
36.63 mm (1.44 in)
34.63 mm (1.36 in)
36.63 mm (1.44 in)
34.63 mm (1.36 in)
32.00 mm (1.26 in)
32.00 mm (1.26 in)
30.90 N/mm (176.44 lb/in) (3.15 kgf/mm)
40.80 N/mm (232.97 lb/in) (4.16 kgf/mm)
30.90 N/mm (176.44 lb/in) (3.15 kgf/mm)
40.80 N/mm (232.97 lb/in) (4.16 kgf/mm)
128.50–157.90 N (28.89–35.50 lbf)
(13.10–16.10 kgf)
128.50–157.90 N (28.89–35.50 lbf)
(13.10–16.10 kgf)
2.5 °/1.6 mm
2.5 °/1.6 mm
Winding direction (intake)
Winding direction (exhaust)
Clockwise
Clockwise
Installed compression spring force (exhaust)
Cylinder
Bore
Wear limit
Taper limit
Out of round limit
Warp limit
74.000–74.016 mm (2.9134–2.9140 in)
74.100 mm (2.9173 in)
0.050 mm (0.0020 in)
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
Piston
Piston-to-cylinder clearance
Limit
Diameter D
Height H
0.010–0.025 mm (0.0004–0.0010 in)
0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
73.983–73.998 mm (2.9127–2.9133 in)
11.0 mm (0.43 in)
2-5
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
H
D
Offset
Offset direction
Piston pin bore inside diameter
Limit
Piston pin outside diameter
Limit
Piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance
0.50 mm (0.0197 in)
Intake side
16.002–16.013 mm (0.6300–0.6304 in)
16.043 mm (0.6316 in)
15.991–16.000 mm (0.6296–0.6299 in)
15.971 mm (0.6288 in)
0.002–0.022 mm (0.0001–0.0009 in)
Piston ring
Top ring
Ring type
Dimensions (B × T)
Barrel
0.90 × 2.75 mm (0.04 × 0.11 in)
B
T
End gap (installed)
Limit
Ring side clearance
Limit
2nd ring
Ring type
Dimensions (B × T)
0.19–0.31 mm (0.0075–0.0122 in)
0.56 mm (0.0220 in)
0.030–0.065 mm (0.0012–0.0026 in)
0.115 mm (0.0045 in)
Taper
0.80 × 2.80 mm (0.03 × 0.11 in)
B
T
End gap (installed)
Limit
Ring side clearance
Limit
Oil ring
Dimensions (B × T)
0.30–0.45 mm (0.0118–0.0177 in)
0.80 mm (0.0314 in)
0.020–0.055 mm (0.0008–0.0022 in)
0.115 mm (0.0045 in)
1.50 × 2.60 mm (0.06 × 0.10 in)
B
T
End gap (installed)
0.10–0.35 mm (0.0039–0.0138 in)
2-6
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Crankshaft
Width A
Runout limit C
Big end side clearance D
C
69.25–69.30 mm (2.726–2.728 in)
0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
0.350–0.850 mm (0.0138–0.0335 in)
C
D
A
Balancer
Balancer drive method
Gear
Clutch
Clutch type
Clutch release method
Clutch lever free play
Friction plate thickness
Wear limit
Plate quantity
Clutch plate thickness
Plate quantity
Warpage limit
Clutch spring free length
Limit
Spring quantity
Clutch housing thrust clearance
Clutch housing radial clearance
Push rod bending limit
Wet, multiple-disc
Inner push, cam push
10.0–15.0 mm (0.39–0.59 in)
2.70–2.90 mm (0.106–0.114 in)
2.60 mm (0.1024 in)
6 pcs
1.50–1.70 mm (0.059–0.067 in)
5 pcs
0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
40.10 mm (1.58 in)
38.10 mm (1.50 in)
5 pcs
0.100–0.350 mm (0.0039–0.0138 in)
0.010–0.044 mm (0.0004–0.0017 in)
0.500 mm (0.0197 in)
Transmission
Transmission type
Primary reduction system
Primary reduction ratio
Secondary reduction system
Secondary reduction ratio
Operation
Gear ratio
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
Main axle runout limit
Drive axle runout limit
Main axle assembly width
37/13 (2.846)
29/16 (1.812)
29/22 (1.318)
29/28 (1.035)
23/28 (0.821)
0.08 mm (0.0032 in)
0.08 mm (0.0032 in)
102.20–102.40 mm (4.02–4.03 in)
Shifting mechanism
Shift mechanism type
Shift fork thickness
Shift drum and guide bar
4.76–4.89 mm (0.1874–0.1925 in)
Constant mesh 5-speed
Spur gear
74/24 (3.083)
Chain drive
48/15 (3.200)
Left foot operation
2-7
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
Air filter
Air filter element
Oil-coated paper element
Carburetor
Type × quantity
Manufacturer
ID mark
MV33 x 1
TEIKEI
3C58 00 (U49)
3C59 00 (CAL)
#135
1.20
5A21-1
2.585
0.90
0.8x1.2
#34
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
2–1/2
0.50
#90
#78
33
11.9 mm (0.47 in)
Main jet
Main air jet
Jet needle
Needle jet
Pilot air jet 1
Pilot outlet
Pilot jet
Bypass 1
Bypass 2
Bypass 3
Bypass 4
Pilot screw turn out
Valve seat size
Starter jet 1
Starter jet 2
Throttle valve size
Float height
Idling condition
Engine idling speed
CO%
Intake vacuum
1300–1500 r/min
0.5–1.5 %
29.0–37.0 kPa (8.6–10.9 inHg) (218–278 mmHg)
95.0–105.0 °C (203.00–221.00 °F)
3.0–5.0 mm (0.12–0.20 in)
Oil temperature
Throttle cable free play
2-8
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
EAS20300
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Frame type
Caster angle
Trail
Semi double cradle
26.42 °
106.0 mm (4.17 in)
Front wheel
Wheel type
Rim size
Rim material
Wheel travel
Radial wheel runout limit
Lateral wheel runout limit
Wheel axle bending limit
Spoke wheel
21x1.60
Aluminum
225.0 mm (8.86 in)
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
0.25 mm (0.01 in)
Rear wheel
Wheel type
Rim size
Rim material
Wheel travel
Radial wheel runout limit
Lateral wheel runout limit
Wheel axle bending limit
Spoke wheel
18M/C x MT2.15
Aluminum
180.0 mm (7.09 in)
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
0.25 mm (0.01 in)
Front tire
Type
Size
Manufacturer/model
Manufacturer/model
Wear limit (front)
With tube
2.75-21 45P
CHENG SHIN/C-6006
DUNLOP/D605F
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
Rear tire
Type
Size
Manufacturer/model
Manufacturer/model
Wear limit (rear)
With tube
120/80-18M/C 62P
CHENG SHIN/C-6006
DUNLOP/D605
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
Tire air pressure (measured on cold tires)
Loading condition
Front
Rear
Loading condition
Front
Rear
0–90 kg (0–198 lb)
125 kPa (18 psi) (1.25 kgf/cm2)
150 kPa (22 psi) (1.50 kgf/cm2)
90 kg–Maximum load
150 kPa (22 psi) (1.50 kgf/cm2)
175 kPa (25 psi) (1.75 kgf/cm2)
Front brake
Type
Operation
Front brake lever free play
Front disc brake
Disc outside diameter × thickness
Brake disc thickness limit
Single disc brake
Right hand operation
2.0–5.0 mm (0.08–0.20 in)
245.0 × 3.5 mm (9.65 × 0.14 in)
3.0 mm (0.12 in)
2-9
CHASSIS SPECIFICATIONS
Brake disc deflection limit
Brake pad lining thickness (inner)
Limit
Brake pad lining thickness (outer)
Limit
Master cylinder inside diameter
Caliper cylinder inside diameter
Caliper cylinder inside diameter
Recommended fluid
0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
5.3 mm (0.21 in)
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
5.3 mm (0.21 in)
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
11.00 mm (0.43 in)
26.99 mm (1.06 in)
22.22 mm (0.87 in)
DOT 4
Rear brake
Type
Operation
Brake pedal position
Rear disc brake
Disc outside diameter × thickness
Brake disc thickness limit
Brake disc deflection limit
Brake pad lining thickness (inner)
Limit
Brake pad lining thickness (outer)
Limit
Master cylinder inside diameter
Caliper cylinder inside diameter
Recommended fluid
203.0 × 4.5 mm (7.99 × 0.18 in)
4.0 mm (0.16 in)
0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
5.2 mm (0.20 in)
1.0 mm (0.04 in)
5.2 mm (0.20 in)
1.0 mm (0.04 in)
12.7 mm (0.50 in)
30.23 mm (1.19 in)
DOT 4
Steering
Steering bearing type
Center to lock angle (left)
Center to lock angle (right)
Taper roller bearing
51.0 °
51.0 °
Front suspension
Type
Spring/shock absorber type
Front fork travel
Fork spring free length
Limit
Installed length
Spring rate K1
Spring stroke K1
Optional spring available
Recommended oil
Quantity
Level
Telescopic fork
Coil spring/oil damper
225.0 mm (8.86 in)
482.0 mm (18.98 in)
472.3 mm (18.59 in)
472.2 mm (18.59 in)
3.65 N/mm (20.84 lb/in) (0.37 kgf/mm)
0.0–225.0 mm (0.00–8.86 in)
No
Yamaha fork oil 15WT
385.0 cm3 (13.02 US oz) (13.58 Imp.oz)
125.0 mm (4.92 in)
Swingarm
Swingarm end free play limit (radial)
Swingarm end free play limit (axial)
1.0 mm (0.04 in)
1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Drive chain
Type/manufacturer
Link quantity
Drive chain slack
15-link length limit
428V/DAIDO
128
40.0–45.0 mm (1.57–1.77 in)
191.5 mm (7.54 in)
Single disc brake
Right foot operation
20.0 mm (0.79 in)
2-10
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
EAS20310
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Voltage
System voltage
12 V
Ignition system
Ignition system
Advancer type
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.)
CDI
Digital
10.0 °/1400 r/min
CDI
Magneto model/manufacturer
Pickup coil resistance
CDI unit model/manufacturer
F5XT/YAMAHA
248–372 Ω (Red–white)
3C5/YAMAHA
Ignition coil
Model/manufacturer
Minimum ignition spark gap
Primary coil resistance
Secondary coil resistance
2JN/YAMAHA
6.0 mm (0.24 in)
0.18–0.28 Ω
6.32–9.48 kΩ
Spark plug cap
Material
Resistance
Resin
10.0 kΩ
AC magneto
Model/manufacturer
Standard output
Stator coil resistance
Rectifier/regulator
Regulator type
Model/manufacturer
No load regulated voltage
Rectifier capacity
Withstand voltage
Semi conductor-short circuit
SH629A-12/SHINDENGEN
14.1–14.9 V
10.0 A
200.0 V
Battery
Model
Voltage, capacity
Specific gravity
Manufacturer
Ten hour rate amperage
YTZ7S
12 V, 6.0 Ah
1.310
GS YUASA
0.60 A
Headlight
Bulb type
Halogen bulb
Bulb voltage, wattage × quantity
Headlight
Tail/brake light
Front turn signal/position light
Rear turn signal light
License plate light
12 V, 60 W/55.0 W × 1
12 V, 8.0 W/27.0 W × 1
12 V, 27 W/5.0 W × 2
12 V, 27.0 W × 2
12 V, 8.0 W × 1
Indicator light
Neutral indicator light
Turn signal indicator light
High beam indicator light
LED
LED
LED
F5XT/YAMAHA
14.0 V, 190 W@5000 r/min
0.688–1.032 Ω (White–white)
2-11
ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Electric starting system
System type
Constant mesh
Starter motor
Model/manufacturer
Power output
Armature coil resistance
Brush overall length
Limit
Brush spring force
Commutator diameter
Limit
Mica undercut (depth)
3C5/YAMAHA
0.40 kW
0.0126–0.0154 Ω
10.0 mm (0.39 in)
3.50 mm (0.14 in)
5.52–8.28 N (19.87–29.80 oz) (563–844 gf)
22.0 mm (0.87 in)
21.0 mm (0.83 in)
1.50 mm (0.06 in)
Starter relay
Model/manufacturer
Amperage
Coil resistance
2768096-A/JIDECO
180.0 A
4.18–4.62 Ω
Horn
Horn type
Quantity
Model/manufacturer
Maximum amperage
Coil resistance
Performance
Plane
1 pcs
HF-12/NIKKO
3.0 A
1.01–1.11 Ω
108–116 dB/2m
Turn signal relay
Relay type
Model/manufacturer
Built-in, self-canceling device
Turn signal blinking frequency
Full transistor
FE218BH/DENSO
No
75–95 cycles/min
Starting circuit cut-off relay
Model/manufacturer
Coil resistance
Carburetor warmer resistance
ACM33211 M04/MATSUSHITA
86.4–105.6 Ω
4.7–9.5 W 20°C (68°F)
Fuses
Main fuse
Spare fuse
20.0 A
20.0 A
2-12
TIGHTENING TORQUES
EAS20320
TIGHTENING TORQUES
EAS20330
GENERAL TIGHTENING TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
This chart specifies tightening torques for standard fasteners with a standard ISO thread pitch.
Tightening torque specifications for special components or assemblies are provided for each
chapter of this manual. To avoid warpage, tighten multi-fastener assemblies in a crisscross pattern and progressive stages until the specified
tightening torque is reached. Unless otherwise
specified, tightening torque specifications require clean, dry threads. Components should be
at room temperature.
A. Distance between flats
B. Outside thread diameter
General tightening torques
A (nut)
B (bolt)
Nm
m•kg
ft•lb
10 mm
6 mm
6
0.6
4.3
12 mm
8 mm
15
1.5
11
14 mm
10 mm
30
3.0
22
17 mm
12 mm
55
5.5
40
19 mm
14 mm
85
8.5
61
22 mm
16 mm
130
13.0
94
EAS20340
ENGINE TIGHTENING TORQUES
Item
Threa
Q’ty
d size
Tightening torque
Camshaft sprocket cover bolt
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Timing chain tensioner bolt
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Intake manifold bolt
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Air induction system pipe
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Cylinder bolt
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Clutch cover bolt
M6
13
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Oil filter element drain bolt
M6
1
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Generator rotor cover bolt
M6
9
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Speed sensor bolt
M6
1
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Crankcase bolt
M6
12
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Drive sprocket cover bolt
M6
3
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Cylinder head bolt (226 mm)
M8
4
22 Nm (2.2 m•kg, 16 ft•lb)
Cylinder head bolt (45 mm)
M8
2
20 Nm (2.0 m•kg, 15 ft•lb)
Camshaft retainer bolt
M6
1
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
Tappet cover
M55
2
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
2-13
Remarks
LT
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Item
Threa
Q’ty
d size
Tightening torque
Remarks
Breather plate bolt
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Spark plug
M12
1
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
Exhaust pipe stud bolt
M8
2
15 Nm (1.5 m•kg, 11 ft•lb)
Oil check bolt
M6
1
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Generator rotor bolt
M10
1
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Balancer driven gear nut
M12
1
55 Nm (5.5 m•kg, 40 ft•lb)
Locknut (valve clearance adjusting screw)
M6
2
14 Nm (1.4 m•kg, 10 ft•lb)
Camshaft sprocket bolt
M10
1
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Timing chain tensioner cap bolt
M6
1
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
Timing chain guide (intake side)
M6
2
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
Oil filter element cover bolt
M6
3
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Oil delivery pipe bolt
M10
1
20 Nm (2.0 m•kg, 15 ft•lb)
Oil delivery pipe bolt
M8
1
17 Nm (1.7 m•kg, 12 ft•lb)
Oil pump cover screw
M6
1
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Oil pump assembly bolt
M6
3
6 Nm (0.6 m•kg, 4.3 ft•lb)
LT
Air filter case bolt
M6
3
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
LT
Air cut-off valve bolt
M6
1
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Exhaust pipe joint bolt
M8
1
20 Nm (2.0 m•kg, 15 ft•lb)
Exhaust pipe nut
M8
2
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
Muffler bolt
M8
2
42 Nm (4.2 m•kg, 30 ft•lb)
Stator assembly lead holder bolt
M5
1
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Engine oil drain bolt
M12
1
20 Nm (2.0 m•kg, 15 ft•lb)
Clutch cable holder bolt
M6
1
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Neutral switch lead holder bolt
M6
1
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Starter clutch idle gear cover bolt
M6
3
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
Bearing retainer
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
LT
Starter clutch bolt
M8
3
30 Nm (30. m•kg, 22 ft•lb)
LT
Primary drive gear nut
M16
1
80 Nm (8.0 m•kg, 58 ft•lb)
2-14
LT
lock
washer
use
LT
LT
lock
washer
use
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Item
Threa
Q’ty
d size
Tightening torque
Remarks
lock
washer
use
Clutch boss nut
M16
1
75 Nm (7.5 m•kg, 54 ft•lb)
Clutch spring bolt
M6
5
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
Lock nut (Push lever adjusting
screw)
M6
1
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
Push lever holding bolt
M8
1
12 Nm (1.2 m•kg, 8.7 ft•lb)
Drive sprocket nut
M18
1
110 Nm (11.0 m•kg, 80 ft\•lb)
Stopper lever bolt
M6
1
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Neutral switch
M10
1
20 Nm (2.0 m•kg, 15 ft•lb)
Starter motor bolt
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Pickup coil bolt
M6
2
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
LT
Stator assembly bolt
M6
3
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
LT
lock
washer
use
LT
EAS20350
CHASSIS TIGHTENING TORQUES
Item
Threa
Q’ty
d size
Tightening torque
Engine mounting nut
M10
3
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Engine bracket nut
M8
2
44 Nm (4.4 m•kg, 32 ft•lb)
Down tube nut
M10
5
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Drive chain tensioner bolt
M8
1
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
Mudguard bolt
M6
2
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Front fender bolt
M6
4
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Grab bar bolt
M8
4
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
Rear side cover bolt
M6
2
9 Nm (0.9 m•kg, 6.5 ft•lb)
Tool box bolt
M6
3
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Horn bracket bolt
M6
1
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Battery/Electrical box bolt
M6
3
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Rectifier/regulator bolt
M6
2
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Starter motor lead bolt
M6
1
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Ignition coil bolt
M6
2
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Pivot shaft nut
M12
1
80 Nm (8.0 m•kg, 58 ft•lb)
Rear shock absorber assembly
upper nut
M12
2
50 Nm (5.0 m•kg, 36 ft•lb)
2-15
Remarks
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Item
Threa
Q’ty
d size
Tightening torque
Relay arm nut (frame side)
M12
2
50 Nm (5.0 m•kg, 36 ft•lb)
Steering stem nut
M22
1
110 Nm (11.0 m•kg, 80 ft•lb)
Lower ring nut
M22
1
–
Fuel tank bolt
M6
3
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Brake hose union bolt
M10
3
30 Nm (3.0 m•kg, 22 ft•lb)
Brake hose holding bolt
M6
1
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Front brake hose holding bolt
(holder and lower bracket)
M6
1
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Handlebar holder bolt
M8
4
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
Sidestand nut
M10
1
44 Nm (4.0 m•kg, 32 ft•lb)
Brake pedal bolt
M10
1
30 Nm (30. m•kg, 22 ft•lb)
Rear brake caliper cover
M6
2
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Rear brake master cylinder bolt
M6
2
13 Nm (1.3 m•kg, 9.4 ft•lb)
Passenger footrest bracket bolt
M8
4
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
Upper bracket pinch bolt
M8
4
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
Meter stay bolt
M6
2
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Headlight unit bolt
M6
2
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Rear shock absorber assembly
lower nut
M10
2
40 Nm (4.0 m•kg, 29 ft•lb)
Connecting arm bolt (relay arm
side)
M12
1
59 Nm (5.9 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Connecting arm bolt (swingarm
side)
M12
1
59 Nm (5.9 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Rear drive chain guide bolt
M6
2
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Lower bracket pinch bolt
M8
4
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
Front fork cap bolt
M30
2
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
Damper rod bolt
M8
2
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
Front wheel axle nut
M14
1
85 Nm (8.5 m•kg, 62 ft•lb)
Front brake disc bolt
M6
6
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Front brake caliper bracket bolt
M10
2
40 Nm (4.0 m•kg, 29 ft•lb)
Front brake caliper support bolt
M10
2
32 Nm (3.2 m•kg, 23 ft•lb)
Bleed screw
M7
2
6 Nm (0.6 m•kg, 4.3 ft•lb)
Rear wheel axle nut
M14
1
85 Nm (8.5 m•kg, 62 ft•lb)
Rear wheel sprocket self-locking
nut
M8
1
33 Nm (3.3 m•kg, 24 ft•lb)
2-16
Remarks
See
NOTE
LT
LT
LT
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Item
Threa
Q’ty
d size
Tightening torque
Rear brake disc bolt
M8
3
28 Nm (2.8 m•kg, 21 ft•lb)
Front brake master cylinder
holder bolt
M6
2
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Front brake lever nut
M6
1
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
Rear brake hose joint (caliper
side)
M10
1
26 Nm (2.6 m•kg, 19 ft•lb)
Rear brake hose joint (hose side)
M10
1
14 Nm (1.4 m•kg, 10 ft•lb)
Rear brake pad support bolt
M10
2
17 Nm (1.7 m•kg, 12 ft•lb)
Remarks
LT
NOTE:
● Tighten
the lower ring nut with the specified torque (38 Nm (3.8 m•kg, 28 ft•lb)).
● Check the front fork leg operates smoothly by turning it to the right and left.
● Loosen the lower ring nut completely and retighten it with the specified torque (4 Nm (0.4 m•kg, 2.9
ft•lb)).
2-17
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
EAS20360
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
EAS20370
ENGINE
Lubrication point
Lubricant
Oil seal lips
LS
All O-rings
LS
All bearing retainers
E
Seat surface of cylinder head bolt (226 mm)
E
Threaded portion of cylinder head bolt (226 mm)
M
Cylinder inner surface
E
Crankshaft pin surface
E
Thrust end surface of connecting rod big end
E
Piston pin surface
E
Piston surface
E
Buffer boss surface
E
Valve stem (intake/exhaust)
M
Valve stem end (intake/exhaust)
M
Rocker arm shaft surface (intake/exhaust)
E
Camshaft profile
M
Rocker arm inner surface (intake/exhaust)
M
Inside of oil pump assembly
E
Oil pump gasket
LS
Starter clutch idle gear 1
E
Starter clutch idle gear 2
E
Starter clutch gear
E
Clutch push rod surface, and surface end
LS
Adjusting screw surface, and surface end (push lever)
LS
Primary driven gear (clutch housing)
E
Push lever shaft surface
E
2-18
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
Lubrication point
Ball surface (clutch push rod)
Lubricant
LS
Main axle assembly
M
Drive axle assembly
M
Shift fork guide bar
E
Shift drum assembly
E
Shift shaft assembly
E
Shift pedal (bolt mount inner surface)
LS
Crankcase mating surface
Yamaha bond No.
1215 (Three Bond
No. 1215®)
Threaded portion of starter motor bolt
Yamaha bond No.
1215 (Three Bond
No. 1215®)
EAS20380
CHASSIS
Lubrication point
Lubricant
Upper bearings and oil seal lip (steering head)
LS
Lower bearings and oil seal lip (steering head)
LS
Front wheel oil seal lip (left/right)
LS
Rear wheel oil seal lip (left/right)
LS
Brake pedal bolt shaft
LS
Throttle grip and throttle cable end
LS
Throttle cable housing inner surface
LS
Brake lever bolt shaft
S
Brake lever and front brake master cylinder moving parts
S
Adjusting screw end (brake lever)
S
Rear brake master cylinder pushrod (boot mount groove)
S
Brake caliper piston seal
S
Brake caliper support bolt shaft
S
Brake pad support bolt shaft
S
2-19
LUBRICATION POINTS AND LUBRICANT TYPES
Lubrication point
Lubricant
Clutch lever cable mount
LS
Clutch lever bolt shaft
LS
Clutch lever moving parts
LS
Pivot shaft surface
M
Swing arm bushing, spacer, and oil seal lip
M
Relay arm bushing, spacer, and oil seal lip
M
Relay arm bolt shaft (on the frame and connecting arm)
M
Relay arm bolt shaft
M
Connecting arm bolt shaft
M
Lower bolt shaft of rear shock absorber assembly
M
Rear wheel axle surface
LS
Sidestand switch end and contact
LS
Frame and sidestand link moving parts
LS
Sidestand bolt collar surface
LS
Drive chain roller collar surface
LS
Tandem footrest moving parts
LS
2-20
LUBRICATION SYSTEM CHART AND DIAGRAMS
EAS20390
LUBRICATION SYSTEM CHART AND DIAGRAMS
EAS20400
ENGINE OIL LUBRICATION CHART
1
2
3
4
5
2
8
10
4
6
7
9
1
5
11
2-21
LUBRICATION SYSTEM CHART AND DIAGRAMS
1. Camshaft
2. Oil filter element
3. Oil level check window
4. Oil pump assembly
5. Oil strainer
6. Drive axle
7. Main axle
8. Plunger pin
9. Crankshaft
10. Cylinder head
11. Oil pan
2-22
LUBRICATION SYSTEM CHART AND DIAGRAMS
EAS20410
LUBRICATION DIAGRAMS
4
1
2
3
8
5
6
2
7
2-23
LUBRICATION SYSTEM CHART AND DIAGRAMS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Crankshaft
Oil pump assembly
Oil strainer
Camshaft
Push lever shaft
Drive axle
Main axle
Oil filter element
2-24
CABLE ROUTING
EAS20430
CABLE ROUTING
AA
10 AB
16
17
AC
I
H
AM
AN 1
21
C
A
2 AN
E
B
A
B C
G
F
F
D
G 4
J
K
3
L
5
6
M
7 N
O
C
Z
A
Y
D
B
E
E
F
15
X
13
AL
14
13
AJ
P
W
AI
8
AD
12 V
U
S 10 R
11 T
22
9 Q
20
AK
13 AE
AF
3 AH
AG 3
8
19
AF
19 16
2-25
18
CABLE ROUTING
R. Pass the negative battery lead behind the wire
harness. Also, pass the battery lead from the
battery/electric parts box through the inside of
the vehicle.
S. Gray tape (headlight relay lead)
T. Install diode 3 in front of the headlight relay.
U. Clamp the rear brake light switch lead using
clamps. Face the clamp opening inwards .
V. Pass the rear brake light switch lead along the
frame, and install the rear brake light switch.
W. Secure the rear brake light switch lead to the
frame using clamps.
X. Clamp the wire harness, tail/brake light leads,
rear turn signal light leads (left and right), and
rear brake light switch lead using plastic locking
tie. Face the end of the locking tie upward and
cut off the excess end of the tie.
Y. Route leads between the frames and inside of
the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
Z. Pass a plastic locking tie through the front side
hole of the frame bracket and then clamp the rear
turn signal light leads (left and right) and tail/
brake light leads. Face the end of the locking tie
upward and cut off the excess end of the locking
tie.
AA. Route the rear turn signal light leads (left and
right), tail/brake light leads, and rear brake light
switch lead under the battery band.
AB. Route the negative battery lead outside other
leads.
AC. Do not route the rear turn signal light leads (left
and right) above the top panel of the battery/
electric parts box.
AD. Clamp the starter relay lead, headlight relay
lead, starting circuit cut-off relay lead, diode1
lead, and diode3 lead using plastic locking tie.
Insert the latchet and the excess tail of the
cable tie into the inside.
AE. Pass the rear brake light switch lead between
the battery/electric parts box and the positive
battery lead.
AF. Less than 2 mm (0.08 in)
AG. Route the carburetor warmer lead outside the
clutch cable and starter motor lead.
AH. Route the carburetor warmer lead outside the
wire harness.
AI. Pass the left handlebar switch lead, clutch
switch lead, main switch lead, and front left turn
signal light lead through the boot. Push and
hold the boot onto the coupler end.
AJ. Pass the horn lead, meter assembly lead, right
handlebar switch lead, front brake light switch
lead, and front right turn signal light lead
through the boot. Push and hold the boot onto
the coupler end.
AK. The boot should be located under the toolbox
end.
AL. Clamp the rear brake switch lead, taillight lead
and two negative battery leads using plastic
locking tie. The cable tie end should face downward. Do not clamp the couplers.
AM. Pass a plastic locking tie through the hole of
frame gasset and then clamp the rear turn signal light leads and tail light lead. Face the end
of the locking tie upward and cut off the excess
end of the locking tie.
AN. The relay with the diode is front side and the
relay with gray tape is rear side.
1. Headlight relay (lead having gray tape)
2. Starting circuit cut-off relay
3. Carburetor warmer lead
4. Throttle pulley
5. Throttle cable (decelerator cable )
6. Throttle cable (accelerator cable)
7. Horn lead
8. Starter motor lead
9. Diode1
10. Negative battery lead
11. Diode3
12. Rear brake light switch
13. Rear brake light switch lead
14. Starter relay lead
15. Turn signal relay
16. Wire harness
17. Rear turn signal light leads (left/right)
18. Positive battery lead
19. Clutch cable
20. Toolbox
21. Clamp
22. Battery box
A. 35 mm (1.38 in)
B. Clamp the wire harness using plastic locking tie.
Face the cable tie end upwards, and cut off the
excess end of the tie. When clamping, locate the
connection of relay leads below the seat rails, but
at the side of the fuel tank bracket (rear fuel tank
bolt mount).
C. 30 mm (1.18 in)
D. Route the starter motor cable outside each lead.
E. Clamp the wire harness using a plastic locking
tie. Face the plastic locking tie end upwards,
and cut off the excess end of the tie.
F. 30 mm (1.18 in)
G. Clamp the wire harness, clutch cable, and carburetor warmer lead using plastic locking tie.
Enter the cable tie in the frame opening. Face
the cable tie end upwards, and cut off the
excess end of the tie.
H. Secure the right handlebar switch lead, front
brake light switch lead, right front turn signal light
lead, and meter assembly leads using clamp.
Face the clamp opening downwards.
I. Route the throttle cable inside of each lead.
J. Route each lead without slack.
K. Route the leads from the cutout of front right
sidecover to inside of the sidecover.
L. Pass the throttle cable through the guide.
M. Each lead should not be exposed to the outside
of the right front sidecover.
N. Pass the horn lead inside of the throttle cable
and secure it to the T-stud of the frame.
O. Route the throttle cable above the cylinder head
breather hose.
P. Clamp the clutch cable, starter motor lead, and
carburetor warmer lead using plastic locking tie.
Face the cable tie end outwards and cut off the
excess end of the tie. Take care not to make the
latchet face inwards towards the vehicle.
Q. Install diode 1 in the battery/electric parts box.
2-26
CABLE ROUTING
A
E
F 2
G
3
F
D
C
B
B
N
4
D
G
1
5
H
L
A
K
G
I
H
6
7
E
8
M
9
J
C
V
10
11
20
V
17 16
15 14 13 12
22
S
O
T
21 U
O
19
18
6 P
Q
R
P 6
Q
7
2-27
CABLE ROUTING
O. Secure two carburetor air vent hoses, carburetor fuel drain hose, and negative battery lead
using clamp. Face the clamp holders on the left
of the vehicle.
P. Pass the speed sensor lead between each
hose and the crankcase.
Q. Secure two carburetor air vent hoses, carburetor fuel drain hose, and neutral switch lead
using clamp.
R. Secure the neutral switch lead using clamp.
S. Pass the rear turn signal light leads (left and
right) through the opening of rear turn signal
light bracket, and secure the leads using plastic
locking tie. Face the cable tie end inward, and
cut off the excess end of the tie.
T. Route the carburetor fuel drain hose through
the guide.
U. Route the carburetor fuel drain hose through
the rear of frame cross tube as shown in the
illustration.(Except for California)
V. Using plastic locking tie, secure the neutral
switch lead and speed sensor lead onto the
clamp as shown in the illustration.
1. Clutch cable
2. Starter cable
3. Air induction system hose (from air filter case to
air cut-off valve)
4. Cylinder head breather hose
5. Sidestand switch lead
6. Speed sensor lead
7. Neutral switch lead
8. Stator assembly lead
9. Main switch lead
10. Meter assembly leads
11. Front brake hose
12. Throttle cable (decelerator cable)
13. Throttle cable (accelerator cable)
14. Right handlebar switch lead
15. Front brake light switch lead
16. Left handlebar switch lead
17. Clutch switch lead
18. Negative battery lead
19. Speed sensor
20. Rear turn signal light
21. Carburetor fuel drain hose
22. Rear turn signal light bracket
A. Each lead should not be exposed to the outside
of the front left sidecover.
B. Secure the left handlebar switch lead, clutch
switch lead, front left turn signal light lead, and
main switch lead using clamp. Face the clamp
opening downwards.
C. Pass the clutch cable through the guide.
D. Enter each lead from the cutout of front left
sidecover and run inside of the sidecover. Install
each lead above the clutch cable without slack.
E. Clamp the starter cable using plastic locking tie
and cut off the excess end of the tie. Face the
end of the tie downwards.
F. Pass the starter cable through the square
shape of air cut-off valve bracket, and route outside the air induction system hose (from air filter
case to air cut-off valve) and cylinder head
breather hose.
G. Secure the ignition coil lead, stator assembly
lead, sidestand switch lead, neutral switch lead,
and speed sensor lead using clamp. Face the
clamp opening upward.
H. Secure the sidestand switch lead to the frame
using clamps.
I. Secure the neutral switch lead and speed sensor lead using clamp. Face the clamp opening
backward.
J. Secure the stator assembly lead using clamps.
The clamp opening should face downwards
away from the vehicle.
K. Secure the wire harness boot onto the guide.
L. Route the clutch cable above the cylinder head
breather hose.
M. Route the clutch cable at the rear of the guide.
N. Pass the ignition coil lead, stator assembly lead,
sidestand switch lead, neutral switch lead, and
speed sensor lead through the boot. Insert all
couplers into the boot.
2-28
CABLE ROUTING
D
C
1
2
16
6 5
A
N
N
15
15
4
3
6
5
B
K
16
B
7
J
3
I
B
8
9
M
E
15 M
F
4
10
F
E
3
16
11
14
J
A
12
5
13
1
H
6
C
D
17
G
E
L
F
2-29
F
4
CABLE ROUTING
1. Clutch cable
2. Front brake hose
3. Front brake light switch lead
4. Right handlebar switch lead
5. Throttle cable (decelerator cable)
6. Throttle cable (accelerator cable)
7. Carburetor warmer lead
8. Starter motor lead
9. Rear brake light switch lead
10. Negative battery lead
11. Tail/brake light lead/
12. Rear turn signal light leads
13. Thermo switch
14. Rectifier/regulator lead
15. Clutch switch lead
16. Left handlebar switch lead
17. Rectifier/regulator
A. Enter two wire harnesses from the opening of
frame cross tube, pass them through the inside
of the vehicle, and secure them using plastic
locking tie. Face the cable tie end backwards
away from the frame cross tube, and cut off the
excess end of the tie.
B. Less than 2 mm (0.08 in)
C. Clamp rear turn signal light leads (left and right)
and tail/brake light leads using plastic locking
tie. Face the cable tie end outwards and cut off
the excess end of the tie.
D. Install each lead under the frame without slack.
E. Secure the rear turn signal light leads (left and
right) and tail/brake light leads with clamp. Face
the clamp opening upwards.
F. Secure the rear left turn signal light lead to the
end of rear fender bracket (soldered to the
frame) using plastic locking ties. Face the cable
tie end backward, and cut off the excess end of
the tie if longer than 3 mm (0.12 in).
G. Install the left rear turn signal light lead under
the frame without slack.
H. Secure the thermo switch lead, rectifier/regulator lead, and rectifier/regulator ground lead
using clamps.
I. Secure the wire harness to the T-stud of the
frame.
J. Clamp the clutch cable, throttle cable (accelerator cable), and throttle cable (decelerator cable)
using plastic locking tie. Face the tied end
inward, and cut off the excess end of the tie.
K. Route the clutch cable between the throttle
cable (accelerator cable) and the throttle cable
(decelerator cable).
L. Install the rectifier/regulator lead in horizontal to
the vehicle.
M. Clamp the plastic locking tie onto the bends of
handle as shown in the illustration.
N. Face the plastic locking tie end downwards.
2-30
CABLE ROUTING
1
2
4
A
3
B
8
I
7
A
C
A
H
5
F
G
6
D
E
L
K
M
J
2-31
CABLE ROUTING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Throttle cable (accelerator cable)
Throttle cable (decelerator cable)
Meter assembly leads
Clutch cable
Left front turn signal light lead
Main switch lead
Right front turn signal light lead
Front brake hose
A. Route the meter assembly leads, and main
switch leads from the top of the guide to the
backward of vehicle.
B. To the meter assembly.
C. Install the left front turn signal light lead to the
cap.
D. Route the clutch cable and front left turn signal
light lead at the rear of the guide. However,
route the main switch leads at the front of the
guide.
E. Install the 3-pin coupler for the meter assembly
and left handlebar switch as shown in the illustration.
F. To the headlight.
G. Band the meter assembly leads, handlebar
switch leads (left and right), front brake light
switch lead, front turn signal light leads (left and
right), clutch switch lead, and main switch leads
with plastic locking tie. The plastic locking tie
should position bottom end of the main switch,
and face tail forward.
H. Bottom end of the main switch
I. Install the front right turn signal light lead to the
cap.
J. Never clamp the throttle cable (accelerator
cable) and the throttle cable (decelerator cable)
using plastic locking tie.
K. Position the 3-pin coupler for the meter assembly and left handlebar switch at the front of vehicle.
L. Forward of the vehicle.
M. Face the latchet side of the band outward.
2-32
CABLE ROUTING
G
2
M
1
K
N
A
J
B
C
C
2
G
B
D
E
F
A
3
L
E
3
D
G
4
H
2-33
I
CABLE ROUTING
1.
2.
3.
4.
Fuel tank
Roll over valve
Canister
Canister breather hose
A. Face the end of clip toward the vehicle.
B. Install the hose to fuel tank by facing the white
paint mark left side of the vehicle.
C. Pass through the hose in the space of the tool
box.
D. Install the hose to the roll over valve and canister.
E. Install the hose to the carburetor and canister.
F. Pass through the hose to the guide.
G. The clip may be installed, which ever direction
end of the clip.
H. Pass through the canister breather hose to the
guide.
I. Install the end of the canister breather hose to
inside of the frame by facing the cut end of the
hose downward.
J. Install the hose to the carburetor by facing the
white paint mark left side of the vehicle.
K. Pass through the hose onto the guide.
L. Face the end of clip right side of the vehicle.
M. Face the end of clip downward of the vehicle.
N. Fasten the hose and cylinder head breather
hose by using the clamp.
2-34
CABLE ROUTING
2-35
PERIODIC CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE...........................................................................3-1
INTRODUCTION......................................................................................3-1
Periodic maintenance chart for the emission control system ...................3-1
General maintenance and lubrication chart..............................................3-2
ENGINE ..........................................................................................................3-5
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE .................................................3-5
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED............................................3-6
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY ...............................3-7
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG ..............................................................3-8
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING........................................................3-8
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION PRESSURE...................................3-9
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL ....................................................3-10
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL ................................................................3-11
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY....................................3-12
REPLACING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT ..............................................3-13
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINT AND INTAKE MANIFOLD ......3-14
CHECKING THE FUEL LINE ...................................................................3-14
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD BREATHER HOSE ........................3-14
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM ....................................................3-14
CHASSIS........................................................................................................3-16
ADJUSTING THE FRONT DISC BRAKE.................................................3-16
ADJUSTING THE REAR DISC BRAKE ...................................................3-16
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL .................................................3-17
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS.................................................3-17
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS ...................................................3-18
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE HOSE ................................................3-18
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE HOSE...................................................3-18
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH..................................3-18
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM ....................................3-19
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK................................................3-20
LUBRICATING THE DRIVE CHAIN.........................................................3-20
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE STEERING HEAD..........................3-21
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK..............................................................3-22
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY...................3-22
CHECKING THE TIRES...........................................................................3-23
CHECKING THE WHEELS ......................................................................3-24
CHECKING AND TIGHTENING THE SPOKES.......................................3-25
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE CABLES .....................................3-25
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS..................................................................3-25
LUBRICATING THE PEDAL ....................................................................3-25
LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND ...........................................................3-25
LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION .............................................3-25
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .................................................................................3-26
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY........................................3-26
CHECKING THE FUSES .........................................................................3-26
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB ....................................................3-26
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM ....................................................3-26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
EAS20450
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
EAS20460
INTRODUCTION
This chapter includes all information necessary to perform recommended checks and adjustments. If
followed, these preventive maintenance procedures will ensure more reliable vehicle operation, a longer service life and reduce the need for costly overhaul work. This information applies to vehicles already
in service as well as to new vehicles that are being prepared for sale. All service technicians should be
familiar with this entire chapter.
NOTE:
If you do not have the tools or experience required for a particular job, have a Yamaha dealer perform
it for you.
EWA10340
WARNING
Modifications not approved by Yamaha may cause loss of performance, excessive emissions,
and render the vehicle unsafe for use. Consult a Yamaha dealer before attempting any changes.
EAS17580
Periodic maintenance chart for the emission control system
INITIAL
No
.
ITEM
ROUTINE
600 mi
(1000 km)
or
1 month
ODOMETER READINGS
4000 mi
(6000 km)
or
6 months
7000 mi
(11000
km)
or
12 months
10000 mi
(16000
km)
or
18 months
13000 mi
(21000
km)
or
24 months
16000 mi
(26000
km)
or
30 months
√
√
√
√
√
√
Replace.
√
Replace.
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
● Check fuel hoses for
1 * Fuel hose
cracks or damage.
● Replace if necessary.
2
Spark plug
3
Spark arrester
● Check condition.
● Adjust gap and clean.
● Replace at 7000 mi (11000
km) or 12 months and
thereafter every 6000 mi
(10000 km) or 12 months.
● Clean.
● Check and adjust valve
4 * Valve clearance
5 *
Crankcase
breather system
6 * Idle speed
7 * Exhaust system
clearance when engine is
cold.
√
● Check breather hose for
cracks or damage.
● Replace if necessary.
● Check and adjust engine
idle speed.
● Check for leakage.
● Tighten if necessary.
● Replace gasket(s) if nec-
essary.
Evaporative emission control sys8 *
tem (For
California only)
● Check control system for
damage.
√
● Replace if necessary.
3-1
√
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
INITIAL
No
.
ITEM
ROUTINE
600 mi
(1000 km)
or
1 month
ODOMETER READINGS
4000 mi
(6000 km)
or
6 months
7000 mi
(11000
km)
or
12 months
10000 mi
(16000
km)
or
18 months
13000 mi
(21000
km)
or
24 months
16000 mi
(26000
km)
or
30 months
● Check the air cut-off valve,
Air induction sys9 *
tem
reed valve, and hose for
damage.
● Replace any damaged
parts.
√
√
* Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, have a Yamaha dealer perform the service.
EAS32164
General maintenance and lubrication chart
INITIAL
No
.
ITEM
ROUTINE
600 mi
(1000 km)
or
1 month
ODOMETER READINGS
4000 mi
(6000 km)
or
6 months
7000 mi
(11000
km)
or
12 months
10000 mi
(16000
km)
or
18 months
13000 mi
(21000
km)
or
24 months
16000 mi
(26000
km)
or
30 months
√
√
√
Replace.
√
● Check condition and for
damage.
1 * Air filter element
● Replace if necessary.
● Replace.
2 * Clutch
● Check operation.
● Adjust or replace cable.
Replace at 13000 mi (21000 km) and there after every 12000 mi (20000 km).
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
● Check operation, fluid
3 * Front brake
level, and for fluid leakage.
● Replace brake pads if nec-
essary.
● Check operation, fluid
4 * Rear brake
level, and for fluid leakage.
● Replace brake pads if nec-
essary.
● Check for cracks or dam-
5 * Brake hose
age.
● Replace.
Every 4 years
● Check runout, spoke tight-
6 * Wheels
ness and for damage.
● Tighten spokes if neces-
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
sary.
● Check tread depth and for
damage.
7 * Tires
● Replace if necessary.
● Check air pressure.
● Correct if necessary.
● Check bearings for smooth
8 * Wheel bearings
operation.
● Replace if necessary.
● Check bush assemblies for
Swingarm pivot
9 *
bushes
looseness.
● Lubricate with lith-
ium-soap-based grease.
3-2
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
INITIAL
No
.
ITEM
ROUTINE
600 mi
(1000 km)
or
1 month
ODOMETER READINGS
4000 mi
(6000 km)
or
6 months
7000 mi
(11000
km)
or
12 months
10000 mi
(16000
km)
or
18 months
13000 mi
(21000
km)
or
24 months
16000 mi
(26000
km)
or
30 months
● Check chain slack, align-
ment and condition.
10
Drive chain
● Adjust and lubricate chain
Every 300 mi (500 km) and after washing the motorcycle or riding in the rain
with a special O-ring chain
lubricant thoroughly.
● Check bearing assemblies
for looseness.
11 * Steering bearings
● Moderately repack with
√
√
√
√
Repack.
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
lithium-soap-based
grease.
● Check all chassis fitting
12 * Chassis fasteners
and fasteners.
● Correct if necessary.
13
Brake lever pivot
shaft
● Apply silicone grease
14
Brake pedal pivot
shaft
● Apply lithium-soap-based
15
Clutch lever pivot
shaft
● Apply lithium-soap-based
16
Shift pedal pivot
shaft
● Apply lithium-soap-based
17
Sidestand pivot
lightly.
grease lightly.
grease lightly.
grease lightly.
● Check operation.
● Apply lithium-soap-based
grease lightly.
18 * Sidestand switch
● Check operation and
replace if necessary.
√
● Check operation and for oil
19 * Front fork
leakage.
● Replace if necessary.
20 *
Shock absorber
assembly
● Check operation and for oil
leakage.
● Replace if necessary.
● Check operation.
● Correct if necessary.
21 *
Rear suspension
link pivots
22
Engine oil
23
Engine oil filter
element
● Replace.
24 *
Front and rear
brake switches
● Check operation.
● Change (warm engine
before draining).
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
● Apply Yamaha chain and
25 * Control cables
cable lube or engine oil
SAE 10W-30 thoroughly.
● Check operation and free
Throttle grip
26 * housing and
cable
play.
● Adjust the throttle cable
free play if necessary.
● Lubricate the throttle grip
housing and cable.
3-3
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
INITIAL
No
.
27 *
ITEM
Lights, signals
and switches
ROUTINE
● Check operation.
● Adjust headlight beam.
ODOMETER READINGS
600 mi
(1000 km)
or
1 month
4000 mi
(6000 km)
or
6 months
7000 mi
(11000
km)
or
12 months
10000 mi
(16000
km)
or
18 months
13000 mi
(21000
km)
or
24 months
16000 mi
(26000
km)
or
30 months
√
√
√
√
√
√
* Since these items require special tools, data and technical skills, have a Yamaha dealer perform the service.
NOTE:
From 19000 mi (31000 km) or 36 months, repeat the maintenance intervals starting from 7000 mi
(11000 km) or 12 months.
NOTE:
● Air
filter
This model’s air filter is equipped with a disposable oil-coated paper element, which must not be
cleaned with compressed air to avoid damaging it.
● The air filter element needs to be replaced more frequently when riding in unusually wet or dusty
areas.
● Hydraulic brake service
● After disassembling the brake master cylinders and calipers, always change the fluid. Regularly
check the brake fluid levels and fill the reservoirs as required.
● Every two years replace the internal components of the brake master cylinders and calipers, and
change the brake fluid.
● Replace the brake hoses every four years and if cracked or damaged.
●
3-4
ENGINE
EAS20471
ENGINE
Valve clearance (cold)
Intake
0.05–0.10 mm (0.0020–0.0039 in)
Exhaust
0.10–0.15 mm (0.0039–0.0059 in)
EAS20520
ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves.
NOTE:
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
● Valve
clearance adjustment should be made
on a cold engine, at room temperature.
● When the valve clearance is to be measured or
adjusted, the piston must be at top dead center
(TDC) on the compression stroke.
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise.
b. When the piston is in the compression stroke,
align camshaft sprocket mark “a” with cylinder head mark “b”. This is the Top Dead Center (TDC).
1. Remove:
● Fuel tank
Refer to “FUEL TANK” on page 6-1.
2. Remove:
● Intake tappet cover “1”
● Exhaust tappet cover “2”
● Camshaft sprocket cover “3”
1
3
c. Make sure that generator rotor mark “c”
aligns with generator rotor cover mark “d”.
2
3. Remove:
● Spark plug cap
● Spark plug
4. Remove:
● Timing mark accessing screw “1”
● Crankshaft end cover “2”
d. Measure the valve clearance using special
thickness gauge “1”.
Out of specification → Adjust.
Special thickness gauge
90890-01399
5. Measure:
● Valve clearance
Out of specification → Adjust.
1
3-5
ENGINE
8. Install:
● Spark plug
● Spark plug cap
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
6. Adjust:
● Valve clearance
T.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
R.
a. Loosen the locknut “1”
b. Insert special thickness gauge “2” between
the adjusting screw and the valve stem end.
c. Using tappet adjusting tool “3”, turn the adjusting screw “4” in direction “a” or “b” to adjust the valve clearance.
9. Install:
● O-ring New
● Camshaft sprocket cover
● O-ring New
● Exhaust tappet cover
● O-ring New
● Intake tappet cover
4
T.
R.
3
a
b
1
Camshaft sprocket cover bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Exhaust tappet cover
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
Intake tappet cover
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
10.Install:
● Fuel tank
Refer to “FUEL TANK” on page 6-1.
2
Direction “a”
Increases the valve clearance.
Direction “b”
Decreases the valve clearance.
EAS20610
ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING SPEED
NOTE:
Before adjusting the engine idling speed, the air
filter element should be clean, and the engine
should have adequate compression.
Tappet adjusting tool
90890-01311
Six piece tappet set
YM-A5970
●
Spark plug
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
1. Install:
● Pocket tester (temperature probe) “1”
(To oil drain bolt)
● Digital tachometer
Hold the adjusting screw to prevent it from
moving and tighten the locknut to specification.
T.
R.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
Digital tachometer
90890-06760
YU-39951-B
Lock nut (valve clearance adjusting screw)
14 Nm (1.4 m•kg, 10 ft•lb)
d. Measure the valve clearance again.
e. If the valve clearance is still out of specification, repeat all of the valve clearance adjustment steps until the specified clearance is
obtained.
1
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7. Install:
● O-ring New
● Crankshaft end cover
● O-ring New
● Timing mark accessing screw
3-6
ENGINE
2. Start the engine and let it warm up until it
reaches specified oil temperature.
5. Adjust:
● Throttle cable play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY” on page 3-9.
Oil temperature
95.0–105.0 °C (203.00–221.00 °F)
Throttle cable free play
3.0–5.0 mm (0.12–0.20 in)
3. Check:
● Engine idling speed
Out of specification → Adjust.
EAS20640
ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE
PLAY
Engine idling speed
1300–1500 r/min
NOTE:
Before adjusting the throttle cable free play, the
engine idling speed should be adjusted properly.
4. Adjust:
● Engine idling speed
1. Check:
● Throttle cable play “a”
Out of specification → Adjust.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Adjust the engine idling speed by turning the
throttle stop screw “1” in direction “a” or “b”.
Direction “a”
Increases the engine idling speed.
Direction “b”
Decreases the engine idling speed.
b
1
a
Throttle cable free play
3.0–5.0 mm (0.12–0.20 in)
a
2. Adjust:
● Throttle cable free play
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Carburetor side
a. Loosen locknut “1” of the pulling (accelerating) throttle cable.
b. Adjust dimension “a” to approximately 5 mm
by turning the adjusting nut “2” as shown.
c. Tighten the locknut “1”.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
a
1
2
3-7
ENGINE
4. Check:
● Electrode “1”
Damage/wear → Replace the spark plug.
● Insulator “2”
Abnormal color → Replace the spark plug.
Normal color is medium-to-light tan.
5. Clean:
● Spark plug
(with a spark plug cleaner or wire brush)
6. Measure:
● Spark plug gap “a”
(with a wire thickness gauge)
Out of specification → Regap.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Handlebar side
a. Loosen the locknut “1”.
b. Adjust the play of throttle cable by turning the
adjusting nut “2” in direction “a” or “b”.
Direction “a”
Increases the throttle cable play.
Direction “b”
Decreases the throttle cable play.
c. Tighten the locknut.
1
2
b
Spark plug gap
0.6–0.7 mm (0.024–0.028 in)
a
EWA12920
WARNING
After adjusting the throttle cable free play,
start the engine and turn the handlebars to
the right and to the left to ensure that this
does not cause the engine idling speed to
change.
7. Install:
● Spark plug
T.
Spark plug
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
R.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
NOTE:
EAS20690
Before installing the spark plug, clean the spark
plug and gasket surface.
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG
1. Disconnect:
● Spark plug cap
2. Remove:
● Spark plug
8. Connect:
● Spark plug cap
EAS20700
ECA13330
CHECKING THE IGNITION TIMING
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Before removing the spark plug, blow away
any dirt accumulated in the spark plug well
with compressed air to prevent it from falling
into the cylinder.
Before checking the ignition timing, check the
wiring connections of the entire ignition system.
Make sure all connections are tight and free of
corrosion.
3. Check:
● Spark plug type
Incorrect → Change.
1. Remove:
● Timing mark accessing screw “1”
Manufacturer/model
NGK/DR7EA
3-8
ENGINE
2. Connect:
● Timing light “1”
● Digital tachometer
NOTE:
The ignition timing is not adjustable.
Timing light
90890-03141
Inductive clamp timing light
YU-03141
Digital tachometer
90890-06760
YU-39951-B
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Remove:
● Digital tachometer
● Timing light
5. Install:
● Timing mark accessing screw
EAS20710
MEASURING THE COMPRESSION
PRESSURE
The following procedure applies to all of the cylinders.
NOTE:
Insufficient compression pressure will result in a
loss of performance.
1
1. Measure:
● Valve clearance
Out of specification → Adjust.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE” on page 3-5.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
3. Disconnect:
● Spark plug cap
4. Remove:
● Spark plug
3. Check:
● Ignition timing
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Start the engine, warm it up to the specified
oil temperature, then adjust to the standard
idling speed.
Engine idling speed
1300–1500 r/min
ECA13340
CAUTION:
b. Check the firing range as shown.
Out of the firing range → Check the ignition
system
Before removing the spark plugs, use compressed air to blow away any dirt accumulated in the spark plug wells to prevent it from
falling into the cylinders.
5. Install:
● Compression gauge “1”
3-9
ENGINE
Compression pressure (with oil applied into the
cylinder)
Compression gauge
90890-03081
Engine compression tester
YU-33223
Reading
Diagnosis
Higher than without oil
Piston ring(s) wear or
damage → Repair.
Same as without oil
Piston, valves, cylinder
head gasket or piston possibly defective → Repair.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7. Install:
● Spark plug
T.
6. Measure:
● Compression pressure
Out of specification → Refer to steps (c) and
(d).
Spark plug
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
R.
8. Connect:
● Spark plug cap
Standard compression pressure
1200 kPa (12.0 kg/cm2/300 rpm)
Minimum compression pressure
1050 kPa (10.5 kg/cm2/300 rpm)
Maximum compression pressure
1300 kPa (13.0 kg/cm2/300 rpm)
EAS20730
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
NOTE:
● Place
● Make
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Set the main switch to “ON”.
b. With the throttle wide open, crank the engine
until the reading on the compression gauge
stabilizes.
EWA12960
WARNING
To prevent sparking, ground the spark plug
lead before cranking the engine.
the vehicle on a suitable stand.
sure the vehicle is upright.
2. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
3. Check:
● Engine oil level
The engine oil level should be between the
minimum level mark “a” and maximum level
mark “b”.
Below the minimum level mark → Add the
recommended engine oil to the proper level.
NOTE:
● Make
use the battery is fully charged when taking measurements.
● Make sure there is no compression leakage
from the connecting section of the compression gauge.
b
c. If the compression pressure is above the
maximum specification, check the cylinder
head, valve surfaces and piston crown for
carbon deposits.
Carbon deposits → Eliminate.
d. If the compression pressure is below the minimum specification, pour a teaspoonful of engine oil into the spark plug bore and measure
again.
Refer to the following table.
a
3-10
ENGINE
3. Remove:
● Engine oil filler cap “1”
● Engine oil drain bolt “2”
(along with the gasket)
● Oil filter element drain bolt “3”
Type
YAMALUBE 4, SAE10W30 or
SAE20W40
Recommended engine oil grade
API service SG type or higher,
JASO standard MA
ACEA standard
G4 or G5
ECA13360
CAUTION:
● Engine
oil also lubricates the clutch and
the wrong oil types or additives could
cause clutch slippage. Therefore, do not
add any chemical additives or use engine
oils with a grade of CD or higher and do not
use oils labeled “ENERGY CONSERVING
II”.
● Do not allow foreign materials to enter the
crankcase.
0
10
30
50
70
2
90 110 130 ˚F
YAMALUBE 4 (10W-30)
or SAE 10W-30
YAMALUBE 4 (20W-40)
or SAE 20W-40
–20 –10
0
10
20
30
40
50 ˚C
4. Drain:
● Engine oil
(completely from the crankcase)
5. If the oil filter element is also to be replaced,
perform the following procedure.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the oil filter element cover “1” and oil
filter element “2”.
b. Replace the O-rings “3”. New
align = "center"/>
NOTE:
Before checking the engine oil level, wait a few
minutes until the oil has settled.
4. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
5. Check the engine oil level again.
NOTE:
Before checking the engine oil level, wait a few
minutes until the oil has settled.
c. Install the new oil filter element and the oil filter element cover.
EAS20810
T.
CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL
1. Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
2. Place a container under the engine oil drain
bolt.
R.
3-11
Oil filter element cover bolt (M10)
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
ENGINE
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
6. Check:
● Engine oil drain bolt gasket
● Oil filter element drain bolt gasket
Damage → Replace.
7. Install:
● Engine oil drain bolt
● Oil filter element drain bolt
(along with the gasket)
T.
R.
b. Start the engine and keep it idling until engine
oil starts to seep from the oil check bolt. If no
engine oil comes out after one minute, turn
the engine off so that it will not seize.
c. Check the engine oil passages, the oil filter
cartridge and the oil pump for damage or
leakage. Refer to “INSTALL THE OIL PUMP
AND BALANCER GEAR” on page 5-41.
d. Start the engine after solving the problem(s)
and check the engine oil pressure again.
e. Tighten the oil check bolt to specification.
Engine oil drain bolt
20 Nm (2.0 m•kg, 15 ft•lb)
Oil filter element drain bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
8. Fill:
● Crankcase
(with the specified amount of the recommended engine oil)
T.
Engine oil quantity
Total amount
1.40 L (1.48 US qt) (1.23 Imp.qt)
Without oil filter element replacement
1.20 L (1.27 US qt) (1.06 Imp.qt)
With oil filter element replacement
1.30 L (1.37 US qt) (1.14 Imp.qt)
Oil check bolt
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
R.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS20870
ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE
PLAY
1. Check:
● Clutch cable free play “a”
Out of specification → Adjust.
9. Install:
● Engine oil filler cap
10.Start the engine, warm it up for several minutes, and then turn it off.
11.Check:
● Engine
(for engine oil leaks)
12.Check:
● Engine oil level
Refer to “CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
LEVEL” on page 3-12.
13.Check:
● Engine oil pressure
Clutch cable free play
10.0–15.0 mm (0.39–0.59 in)
a
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Slightly loosen the oil check bolt “1”.
2. Adjust:
● Clutch cable free play
3-12
ENGINE
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
NOTE:
Clutch lever side
a. Slide rubber cover “1” from the clutch lever.
b. Loosen the locknut “2”.
c. Fully tighten the adjusting bolt “3”.
d. Tighten the locknut “2”.
e. Slide and return rubber cover “1” to original
position.
Check the air filter check hose locating at the
bottom of air filter case. If a foreign material such
as dust and water is found, replace the air filter
element. Also, clean the air filter case and air filter check hose.
2. Remove:
● Seat
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
3. Remove:
● Air filter case cap “1”
2
3
1
1
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Clutch cable side
a. Slide rubber cover “1” from the clutch lever.
b. Loosen the locknut “2”.
c. Adjust the play of clutch cable by turning the
adjusting bolt “3” in direction “a” or “b”.
4. Check:
● Air filter element “1”
Damage/obstruction → Replace.
NOTE:
● Replace
the air filter element every 20.000 km
(12,427.42 mi) of operation.
● The air filter needs more frequent service if you
are riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
Direction “a”
Increases the clutch cable play.
Direction “b”
Decreases the clutch cable play.
1
d. Tighten the locknut “2”.
e. Slide and return rubber cover “1” to original
position.
b 3 2
5. Install:
● Air filter element
● Air filter case cap
1
a
ECA14401
CAUTION:
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS20961
REPLACING THE AIR FILTER ELEMENT
1. Check:
● Air filter check hose
3-13
Never operate the engine without the air filter
element installed. Unfiltered air will cause
rapid wear of engine parts and may damage
the engine. Operating the engine without the
air filter element will also affect carburetor
synchronization, leading to poor engine performance and possible overheating.
ENGINE
NOTE:
Make sure that the air filter element is installed
securely in the air filter case to prevent any air
leaks.
1
6. Install:
● Seat
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
EAS20990
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR JOINT AND
INTAKE MANIFOLD
1. Remove:
● Fuel tank
Refer to “FUEL TANK” on page 6-1.
2. Check:
● Carburetor joint “1”
● Intake manifold “2”
Cracks/damage → Replace.
Refer to “CARBURETOR” on page 6-3.
3. Install:
● Left fuel tank side cover
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
EAS21050
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD
BREATHER HOSE
1. Remove:
● Left fuel tank side cover
● Right fuel tank side cover
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
2. Check:
● Cylinder head breather hose “1”
Cracks/damage → Replace.
Loose connection → Connect properly.
1
ECA14920
2
CAUTION:
Make sure the cylinder head breather hose is
routed correctly.
3. Install:
● Fuel tank
Refer to “FUEL TANK” on page 6-1.
EAS21030
CHECKING THE FUEL LINE
The following procedure applies to all of the fuel,
vacuum and breather hoses.
1. Remove:
● Left fuel tank side cover
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
2. Check:
● Fuel hose “1”
● Vacuum hose
● Breather hose
Cracks/damage → Replace.
Loose connection → Connect properly or replace the clip hose.
1
3. Install:
● Right fuel tank side cover
● Left fuel tank side cover
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
EAS21080
CHECKING THE EXHAUST SYSTEM
The following procedure applies to all of the exhaust pipes and gaskets.
1. Check:
● Exhaust pipe “1”
● Muffler “2”
Cracks/damage → Replace.
● Gasket
3-14
ENGINE
Exhaust gas leaks → Replace.
2. Check:
Tightening torque
● Exhaust pipe nut “3”
● Exhaust pipe joint bolt “4”
● Muffler bolt “5”
T.
R.
Exhaust pipe nut
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
Exhaust pipe joint bolt
20 Nm (2.0 m•kg, 15 ft•lb)
Muffler bolt
42 Nm (4.2 m•kg, 30 ft•lb)
3
1
2
5
4
1
2
5
3-15
CHASSIS
erably reduce braking performance.
EAS21140
CHASSIS
ECA13490
CAUTION:
EAS21170
ADJUSTING THE FRONT DISC BRAKE
1. Check:
● Brake lever free play “a”
Out of specification → Adjust.
After adjusting the brake lever position,
make sure there is no brake drag.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
a
EAS21200
ADJUSTING THE REAR DISC BRAKE
1. Check:
● Brake pedal position
(Height “b” from footrest position “a” to brake
pedal top position)
Out of specification → Adjust.
Brake pedal position
20.0 mm (0.79 in)
Brake lever free play
2.0–5.0 mm (0.08–0.20 in)
2. Adjust:
● Brake lever free play
a
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Loosen the locknut “1”.
b. Turn the adjusting screw “2” in direction “a” or
“b” until the specified brake lever free play is
obtained.
b
Direction “a”
Brake lever free play is increased.
Direction “b”
Brake lever free play is decreased.
2. Adjust:
● Brake pedal position
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Loosen the locknut “1”.
b. Turn the adjusting nut “2” in direction “a” or
“b” until the specified brake pedal position is
obtained.
c. Tighten the locknut “1”.
Direction “a”
Brake pedal is raised.
Direction “b”
Brake pedal is lowered.
a
b
1
2
a
EWA13050
b
WARNING
2
1
A soft or spongy feeling in the brake lever
can indicate the presence of air in the brake
system. Before the vehicle is operated, the
air must be removed by bleeding the brake
system. Air in the brake system will consid-
3-16
CHASSIS
c. Tighten the locknut “1” to specification.
A
T.
Locknut
17 Nm (1.7 m•kg, 12.5 ft•lb)
R.
EWA5UXB005
WARNING
a
A soft or spongy feeling in the brake pedal
can indicate the presence of air in the brake
system. Before the vehicle is operated, the
air must be removed by bleeding the brake
system. Air in the brake system will considerably reduce braking performance and
could result in loss of control and possibly
an accident. Therefore, check and, if necessary, bleed the brake system.
B
a
ECA13510
CAUTION:
After adjusting the brake pedal position,
make sure there is no brake drag.
A. Front
B. Rear
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Adjust:
● Rear brake light switch
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCH” on page 3-20.
EWA13090
WARNING
● Use
only the designated brake fluid. Other
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
brake performance.
● Refill with the same type of brake fluid that
is already in the system. Mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction, leading to poor brake performance.
● When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the brake fluid reservoir. Water
will significantly lower the boiling point of
the brake fluid and could cause vapor lock.
EAS21240
CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
NOTE:
● Place
● Make
the vehicle on a suitable stand.
sure the vehicle is upright.
2. Check:
● Brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark “a” → Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
ECA13540
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up
any spilt brake fluid immediately.
NOTE:
In order to ensure a correct reading of the brake
fluid level, make sure the top of the brake fluid
reservoir is horizontal.
EAS21250
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS
The following procedure applies to all of the
brake pads.
1. Operate the brake.
3-17
CHASSIS
Loose connection → Tighten the clamp bolt.
3. Hold the vehicle upright and apply the front
brake several times.
4. Check:
● Front brake hose
Brake fluid leakage → Replace the damaged
hose.
Refer to “FRONT BRAKE” on page 4-12.
2. Check:
● Front brake pad
Wear indicator grooves “a” almost disappeared → Replace the brake pads as a set.
Refer to “FRONT BRAKE” on page 4-12.
EAS21290
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE HOSE
1. Check:
● Front brake hose “1”
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace.
a
EAS21260
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE PADS
The following procedure applies to all of the
brake pads.
1. Operate the brake.
2. Check:
● Rear brake pad
Wear indicator grooves “a” almost disappeared → Replace the brake pads as a set.
Refer to “REAR BRAKE” on page 4-24.
1
2. Check:
● Brake hose clamp
Loose connection → Tighten the clamp bolt.
3. Hold the vehicle upright and apply the rear
brake several times.
4. Check:
● Rear brake hose
Brake fluid leakage → Replace the damaged
hose.
Refer to “REAR BRAKE” on page 4-24.
a
a
EAS21330
ADJUSTING THE REAR BRAKE LIGHT
SWITCH
EAS21270
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE HOSE
1. Check:
● Front brake hose “1”
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace.
NOTE:
The rear brake light switch is operated by movement of the brake pedal. The rear brake light is
properly adjusted when the brake light comes on
just before the braking effect starts.
1. Check:
● Brake light operation timing
Incorrect → Adjust.
2. Adjust:
● Brake light operation timing
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Hold the main body “1” of the rear brake light
switch so that it does not rotate and turn the
adjusting nut “2” in direction “a” or “b” until the
rear brake light comes on at the proper time.
1
2. Check:
● Brake hose clamp
3-18
CHASSIS
screw “2”, and place an oil pan under the
plastic hose end.
Direction “a”
Brake light comes on sooner.
Direction “b”
Brake light comes on later.
A
2
1
1
a
b
2
B
2
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
1
EAS21350
BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC BRAKE
SYSTEM
EWA13100
WARNING
A. Front
B. Rear
Bleed the hydraulic brake system whenever:
● the system is disassembled.
● a brake hose is loosened, disconnected or
replaced.
● the brake fluid level is very low.
● brake operation is faulty.
1. Remove:
● Brake master cylinder reservoir cap
d. Place the other end of the hose into a container.
e. Slowly apply the brake several times.
f. Fully pull the brake lever or fully press down
the brake pedal and hold it in position.
g. Loosen the bleed screw.
NOTE:
NOTE:
● Be
careful not to spill any brake fluid or allow
the brake master cylinder reservoir to overflow.
● When bleeding the hydraulic brake system,
make sure there is always enough brake fluid
before applying the brake. Ignoring this precaution could allow air to enter the hydraulic
brake system, considerably lengthening the
bleeding procedure.
● If bleeding is difficult, it may be necessary to let
the brake fluid settle for a few hours. Repeat
the bleeding procedure when the tiny bubbles
in the hose have disappeared.
Loosening the bleed screw will release the pressure and cause the brake lever to contact the
throttle grip or the brake pedal to fully extend.
2. Bleed:
● Hydraulic brake system
k. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the proper level
with the recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” on page 3-19.
h. Tighten the bleed screw and then release the
brake lever or brake pedal.
i. Repeat steps (e) to (h) until all of the air bubbles have disappeared from the brake fluid in
the plastic hose.
j. Tighten the bleed screw to specification.
T.
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 m•kg, 4.3 ft•lb)
R.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the proper level
with the recommended brake fluid.
b. Install the diaphragm (brake master cylinder
reservoir or brake fluid reservoir).
c. Connect clear plastic hose “1” tightly to bleed
EWA13110
WARNING
After bleeding the hydraulic brake system,
3-19
CHASSIS
check the brake operation.
●
Drive chain slack
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Loosen the wheel axle nut “1”.
b. Turn the drive chain adjusting plate “2” in direction “a” or “b” until the specified drive chain
slack is obtained.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS21420
ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN SLACK
NOTE:
Direction “a”
Drive chain is tightened.
Direction “b”
Drive chain is loosened.
The drive chain slack must be checked at the
tightest point on the chain.
ECA13550
CAUTION:
A drive chain that is too tight will overload
the engine and other vital parts, and one that
is too loose can skip and damage the swingarm or cause an accident. Therefore, keep
the drive chain slack within the specified limits.
2
a
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
1
EWA13120
WARNING
b
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
To maintain the proper wheel alignment, adjust
both sides evenly.
NOTE:
Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the
rear wheel is elevated.
c. Tighten the wheel axle nut to specification.
T.
2. Spin the rear wheel several times and find the
tightest position of drive chain.
3. Check:
● Drive chain slack “a”
Out of specification → Adjust.
Rear wheel axle nut
85 Nm (8.5 m•kg, 62 ft•lb)
R.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS21440
LUBRICATING THE DRIVE CHAIN
The drive chain consists of many interacting
parts. If the drive chain is not maintained properly, it will wear out quickly. Therefore, the drive
chain should be serviced, especially when the
vehicle is used in dusty areas.
This vehicle has a drive chain with small rubber
O-rings between each side plate. Steam cleaning, high-pressure washing, certain solvents,
and the use of a coarse brush can damage
these O-rings. Therefore, use only kerosene to
clean the drive chain. Wipe the drive chain dry
and thoroughly lubricate it with engine oil or
chain lubricant that is suitable for O-ring chains.
Do not use any other lubricants on the drive
chain since they may contain solvents that could
damage the O-rings.
a
Drive chain slack
40.0–45.0 mm (1.57–1.77 in)
NOTE:
● Measure
the drive chain slack in the intermediate position between drive axle center and rear
wheel axle center.
● If the chain contacts the drive chain guide, this
is the limit of chain slack.
4. Adjust:
3-20
CHASSIS
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil or chain lubricant
suitable for O-ring chains
EAS21510
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING THE
STEERING HEAD
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
EWA13120
WARNING
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
Steering nut wrench
90890-01403
Spanner wrench
YU-33975
NOTE:
Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the
front wheel is elevated.
T.
2. Check:
● Steering head
Grasp around the outer tube of the front fork
legs and gently rock the front fork.
Binding/looseness → Adjust the steering
head.
3. Remove:
● Upper bracket
Refer to “STEERING HEAD” on page 4-47.
4. Adjust:
● Steering head
R.
c. Loosen the lower ring nut “4” completely, and
then use the steering nut wrench and retighten the nut with the specified torque.
EWA13140
WARNING
Do not overtighten the lower ring nut.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
T.
a. Remove the lock washer “1”, the upper ring
nut “2”, and the rubber washer “3”.
R.
b. Loosen the lower ring nut “4” first, then use
the steering nut wrench “5” and retighten the
nut with the specified torque. Next, check the
steering by turning it to the right and left a few
times.
Lower ring nut (initial tightening
torque)
38 Nm (3.8 m•kg, 2.8 ft•lb)
Lower ring nut (final tightening
torque)
4 Nm (0.4 m•kg, 2.9 ft•lb)
d. Check the steering head for looseness or
binding by turning the front fork all the way in
both directions. If any binding is felt, remove
the lower bracket and check the upper and
lower bearings.
Refer to “STEERING HEAD” on page 4-47.
e. Install the rubber washer “3”.
f. Install the upper ring nut “2”.
g. Finger tighten the upper ring nut “2”, then
align the slots of both ring nuts. If necessary,
hold the lower ring nut and tighten the upper
ring nut until their slots are aligned.
NOTE:
Make sure the lock washer tabs “a” sit correctly
in the ring nut slots “b”.
NOTE:
Set the torque wrench at a right angle to the
steering nut wrench.
3-21
CHASSIS
EAS21590
ADJUSTING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
EWA13120
WARNING
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
Spring preload
ECA13590
CAUTION:
Never go beyond the maximum or minimum
adjustment positions.
1. Adjust:
● Spring preload
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5. Install:
● Upper bracket
Refer to “STEERING HEAD” on page 4-47.
NOTE:
Adjust the spring preload by removing the rear
shock absorber.
EAS21530
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Adjust the spring preload with a ring nut
wrench.
EWA13120
WARNING
Ring nut wrench
90890-01268
Spanner wrench
YU-01268
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
2. Check:
● Inner tube
Damage/scratches → Replace.
● Oil seal
Oil leakage → Replace.
3. Hold the vehicle upright and apply the front
brake.
4. Check:
● Front fork operation
Push down hard on the handlebar several
times and check if the front fork rebounds
smoothly.
Rough movement → Repair.
Refer to “FRONT FORK” on page 4-39.
b. Loosen the locknut “1”.
c. When you turn adjusting ring “2” in direction
“a” or “b”, spring length “c” changes and you
can adjust the spring preload.
Direction “a”
Spring preload is increased (suspension
is harder).
Direction “b”
Spring preload is decreased (suspension
is softer).
b
a
3-22
1
2
CHASSIS
speed.
Spring length “c”
Standard
197.0 mm
Minimum (hard)
187.0 mm
Maximum (soft)
207.0 mm
● Operation
of an overloaded vehicle could
cause tire damage, an accident or an injury.
NEVER OVERLOAD THE VEHICLE.
Tire air pressure (measured on
cold tires)
Loading condition
0–90 kg (0–198 lb)
Front
125 kPa (18 psi) (1.25 kgf/cm2)
Rear
150 kPa (22 psi) (1.50 kgf/cm2)
Loading condition
90 kg–Maximum load
Front
150 kPa (22 psi) (1.50 kgf/cm2)
Rear
175 kPa (25 psi) (1.75 kgf/cm2)
High-speed riding
Front
150 kPa (1.50 kgf/cm2)
Rear
175 kPa (1.75 kgf/cm2)
Maximum load
160 kg (353 lb)
c
d. Tighten the locknut.
T.
Locknut
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
R.
* Total weight of rider, passenger, cargo
and accessories
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS21650
CHECKING THE TIRES
The following procedure applies to both of the
tires.
1. Check:
● Tire pressure
Out of specification → Regulate.
EWA13190
WARNING
It is dangerous to ride with a worn-out tire.
When the tire tread reaches the wear limit,
replace the tire immediately.
2. Check:
● Tire surfaces
Damage/wear → Replace the tire.
1
2
EWA13180
WARNING
● The
tire pressure should only be checked
and regulated when the tire temperature
equals the ambient air temperature.
● The tire pressure and the suspension must
be adjusted according to the total weight
(including cargo, rider, passenger and accessories) and the anticipated riding
1. Tire tread depth
2. Side wall
3. Wear indicator
3-23
3
CHASSIS
Front tire
Size
2.75-21 45P
Manufacturer/model
CHENG SHIN/C-6006
Manufacturer/model
DUNLOP/D605F
Wear limit (front)
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
Wear limit (rear)
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
EWA14080
WARNING
● Do
not use a tubeless tire on a wheel designed only for tube tires to avoid tire failure and personal injury from sudden
deflation.
● When using a tube tire, be sure to install the
correct tube.
● Always replace a new tube tire and a new
tube as a set.
● To avoid pinching the tube, make sure the
wheel rim band and tube are centered in the
wheel groove.
● Patching a punctured tube is not recommended. If it is absolutely necessary to do
so, use great care and replace the tube as
soon as possible with a good quality replacement.
Rear tire
Size
120/80-18M/C 62P
Manufacturer/model
CHENG SHIN/C-6006
Manufacturer/model
DUNLOP/D605
EWA13210
WARNING
New tires have a relatively low grip on the
road surface until they have been slightly
worn. Therefore, approximately 100 km
should be traveled at normal speed before
any high-speed riding is done.
NOTE:
Align the mark “1” with the valve installation
point.
1
Tube wheel
Tube tire only
Tubeless wheel
Tube or tubeless tire
EAS21670
EWA14090
CHECKING THE WHEELS
The following procedure applies to both of the
wheels.
1. Check:
● Wheel
Damage/out-of-round → Replace.
WARNING
After extensive tests, the tires listed below
have been approved by Yamaha Motor Co.,
Ltd. for this model. The front and rear tires
should always be by the same manufacturer
and of the same design. No guarantee concerning handling characteristics can be given if a tire combination other than one
approved by Yamaha is used on this vehicle.
EWA13260
WARNING
Never attempt to make any repairs to the
wheel.
NOTE:
After a tire or wheel has been changed or replaced, always balance the wheel.
3-24
CHASSIS
EAS21680
EAS21690
CHECKING AND TIGHTENING THE SPOKES
The following procedure applies to all of the
spokes.
1. Check:
● Spoke
Bends/damage → Replace.
Loose → Tighten.
Tap the spokes with a screwdriver.
CHECKING AND LUBRICATING THE
CABLES
The following procedure applies to all of the inner and outer cables.
EWA13270
WARNING
Damaged outer cable may cause the cable to
corrode and interfere with its movement. Replace damaged outer cable and inner cables
as soon as possible.
1. Check:
● Outer cable
Damage → Replace.
2. Check:
● Cable operation
Rough movement → Lubricate.
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil or a suitable cable lubricant
NOTE:
NOTE:
A tight spoke will emit a clear, ringing tone; a
loose spoke will sound flat.
Hold the cable end upright and pour a few drops
of lubricant into the cable sheath or use a suitable lubricating device.
2. Tighten:
● Spoke (Front/rear)
(with a spoke wrench “1” and torque wrench “2” )
EAS21700
LUBRICATING THE LEVERS
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal
moving parts of the levers.
T.
Spoke (Front wheel)
2 Nm (0.2 m•kg, 1.4 ft•lb)
R.
Clutch lever
Lithium-soap-based grease
Brake lever
Silicone grease
Spoke wrench
90890-01522
EAS21710
LUBRICATING THE PEDAL
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal
moving parts of the pedal.
1
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
EAS21720
LUBRICATING THE SIDESTAND
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal
moving parts of the sidestand.
2
3. Tighten:
● Spoke (Rear wheel)
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
T.
Spoke (Rear wheel)
4 Nm (0.4 m•kg, 2.9 ft•lb)
R.
EAS21740
LUBRICATING THE REAR SUSPENSION
Lubricate the pivoting point and metal-to-metal
moving parts of the rear suspension.
NOTE:
Be sure to tighten the spokes before and after
break-in.
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide grease
3-25
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
EAS21750
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
EAS21760
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
Refer to “ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS” on
page 7-29.
EAS21770
1
CHECKING THE FUSES
Refer to “ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS” on
page 7-29.
EWA13320
EAS21780
WARNING
REPLACING THE HEADLIGHT BULB
1. Remove:
● Headlight cowling “1”
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot,
keep flammable products and your hands
away from the bulb until it has cooled down.
5. Install:
● Headlight bulb New
Secure the new headlight bulb with the headlight bulb holder.
1
ECA13690
CAUTION:
Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise
the transparency of the glass, the life of the
bulb and the luminous flux will be adversely
affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled,
thoroughly clean it with a cloth moistened
with alcohol or lacquer thinner.
2. Remove:
● Headlight unit bolts “1”
6. Install:
● Headlight bulb holder
● Bulb cover
● Headlight coupler
7. Install:
● Headlight unit
1
T.
Headlight unit bolt
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
R.
3. Disconnect:
● Headlight coupler “1”
● Bulb cover “2”
EAS21800
ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHT BEAM
1. Adjust:
● Headlight beam (vertically)
1
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the adjusting screw “1” in direction “a” or
“b”.
Direction “a”
Headlight beam is raised.
Direction “b”
Headlight beam is lowered.
2
4. Remove:
● Headlight bulb holder “1”
3-26
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
a
b
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3-27
CHASSIS
GENERAL CHASSIS .....................................................................................4-1
FRONT WHEEL .............................................................................................4-2
REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL ..........................................................4-4
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL ...........................................................4-4
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT WHEEL.................................................4-4
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT WHEEL.......................................................4-5
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC BALANCE ..........................4-5
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL (DISC) .............................................4-6
REAR WHEEL................................................................................................4-8
REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL (DISC).................................................4-10
DISASSEMBLING THE REAR WHEEL ...................................................4-10
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL .............................................................4-10
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE REAR WHEEL SPROCKET ..........4-10
ASSEMBLING THE REAR WHEEL .........................................................4-11
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC BALANCE ............................4-11
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL ...........................................................4-11
FRONT BRAKE..............................................................................................4-12
INTRODUCTION......................................................................................4-17
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE DISC ..................................................4-17
REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS ...............................................4-18
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER...........................................4-19
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER.................................4-19
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER ...........................................4-19
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER.......................................4-20
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER .........................................4-20
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER........................4-21
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ........................4-21
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ....................4-22
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ......................4-22
REAR BRAKE................................................................................................4-24
INTRODUCTION......................................................................................4-29
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE DISC ....................................................4-29
REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS .................................................4-29
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER .............................................4-30
DISASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER ...................................4-30
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER..............................................4-31
ASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER .........................................4-31
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER............................................4-31
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ..........................4-32
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER...........................4-33
ASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER ......................4-33
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER.........................4-33
HANDLEBAR .................................................................................................4-35
REMOVING THE HANDLEBARS ............................................................4-36
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR ...............................................................4-36
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR .............................................................4-36
FRONT FORK ................................................................................................4-39
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS...................................................4-42
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS.........................................4-42
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS ...................................................4-43
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS...............................................4-43
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS .................................................4-46
STEERING HEAD ..........................................................................................4-47
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET .....................................................4-49
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD........................................................4-49
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD......................................................4-49
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY .....................................................4-51
HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER.........................................4-52
DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ......................................4-52
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ...................4-52
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ....................4-52
CHECKING THE CONNECTING ARM AND RELAY ARM......................4-52
INSTALLING THE RELAY ARM ..............................................................4-52
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY ..................4-53
SWINGARM ...................................................................................................4-54
REMOVING THE SWINGARM ................................................................4-55
CHECKING THE SWINGARM .................................................................4-55
INSTALLING THE SWINGARM ...............................................................4-55
CHAIN DRIVE ................................................................................................4-57
REMOVING THE DRIVE CHAIN .............................................................4-58
CHECKING THE DRIVE CHAIN ..............................................................4-58
CHECKING THE DRIVE SPROCKET .....................................................4-59
INSTALLING THE DRIVE CHAIN ............................................................4-59
GENERAL CHASSIS
EAS21830
GENERAL CHASSIS
Removing the cowling
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
1
3
8
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
5
7
2
T.
R.
4
6
R.
R.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
T.
Order
9 Nm (0.9 m • kg, 6.5 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
4 Nm (0.4 m • kg, 2.9 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
Seat
Rear left side cover
Rear right side cover
Left fuel tank side cover
Right fuel tank side cover
Front left side cover
Front right side cover
Tool box
Remarks
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-1
FRONT WHEEL
EAS21870
FRONT WHEEL
Removing the front wheel and brake disc
2
4
1
3
T.
R.
85 Nm (8.5 m • kg, 62 ft • Ib)
5
4
(6)
R.
Order
T.
LT
Job/Parts to remove
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
Remarks
NOTE:
Use a suitable stand to raise the front wheel
off the ground.
1
2
3
4
5
Front wheel axle nut
Front wheel axle
Front wheel assembly
Collar/dust seal
Front brake disc
1
1
1
2/2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-2
FRONT WHEEL
Disassembling the front wheel
New 1
2
3
2
1 New
Order
1
2
3
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Oil seal
Wheel bearing
Spacer
Remarks
2
2
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-3
FRONT WHEEL
Over the specified limits → Replace.
EAS21890
REMOVING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
Radial wheel runout limit
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Lateral wheel runout limit
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
EWA13120
WARNING
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
2. Elevate:
● Front wheel
b
NOTE:
a
Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the
front wheel is elevated.
EAS21930
CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Check:
● Front wheel axle
Roll the wheel axle on a flat surface.
Bends → Replace.
5. Check:
● Collars
Damage/wear → Replace.
6. Check:
● Wheel bearings
Front wheel turns roughly or is loose → Replace the wheel bearings.
● Oil seals
Damage/wear → Replace.
EWA13460
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent wheel axle.
2. Check:
● Tire
● Front wheel
Damage/wear → Replace.
Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” on page
3-23 and “CHECKING THE WHEELS” on
page 3-24.
3. Check:
● Spokes
Bends/damage → Replace.
Loose → Tighten.
Refer to “CHECKING AND TIGHTENING
THE SPOKES” on page 3-25.
EAS21910
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Remove:
● Oil seals
● Wheel bearings
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Clean the outside of the front wheel hub.
b. Remove the oil seals “1” with a flat-head
screwdriver.
NOTE:
To prevent damaging the wheel, place a rag “2”
between the screwdriver and the wheel surface.
NOTE:
After tightening the spokes, measure the front
wheel runout.
4. Measure:
● Front wheel radial runout “a”
● Front wheel lateral runout “b”
4-4
FRONT WHEEL
2
4
3
2
1
1
c. Remove the wheel bearings with a general
bearing puller.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS21970
ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL STATIC
BALANCE
NOTE:
● After
replacing the tire, wheel or both, the front
wheel static balance should be adjusted.
● Adjust the front wheel static balance with the
brake disc installed.
1. Remove:
● Balancing weight(s)
2. Find:
● Front wheel’s heavy spot
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
NOTE:
EAS21960
Place the front wheel on a suitable balancing
stand.
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT WHEEL
1. Install:
● Wheel bearings
● Oil seals New
● Spacer
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Spin the front wheel.
b. When the front wheel stops, put an “X1” mark
at the bottom of the wheel.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Install the new wheel bearings and oil seals in
the reverse order of disassembly.
EC3C51001
CAUTION:
Do not contact the wheel bearing inner race
“1”or balls “2”. Support with the outer race
“3”.
NOTE:
Use a socket “4” that matches the diameter of
the wheel bearing outer race and oil seal.
c. Turn the front wheel 90° so that the “X1” mark
is positioned as shown.
d. Release the front wheel.
e. When the wheel stops, put an “X2” mark at
the bottom of the wheel.
4-5
FRONT WHEEL
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Check:
● Front wheel static balance
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the front wheel and make sure it stays at
each position shown.
f. Repeat steps (d) through (f) several times until all the marks come to rest at the same spot.
g. The spot where all the marks come to rest is
the front wheel’s heavy spot “X”.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Adjust:
● Front wheel static balance
b. If the front wheel does not remain stationary
at all of the positions, rebalance it.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Install a balancing weight “1” onto the rim exactly opposite the heavy spot “X”.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS22000
INSTALLING THE FRONT WHEEL (DISC)
The following procedure applies to both of the
brake discs.
1. Install:
● Front brake disc
Refer to “CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE
DISC” on page 4-17.
2. Lubricate:
● Front wheel axle
● Oil seal lips
NOTE:
Start with the lightest weight.
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
b. Turn the front wheel 90° so that the heavy
spot is positioned as shown.
3. Tighten:
● Front wheel axle nut “1”
1
c. If the heavy spot does not stay in that position, install a heavier weight.
d. Repeat steps (b) and (c) until the front wheel
is balanced.
4-6
FRONT WHEEL
T.
Front axle nut
85 Nm (8.5 m•kg, 62 ft•lb)
R.
EWA13500
WARNING
Make sure the brake hose is routed properly.
ECA14140
CAUTION:
Before tightening the wheel axle nut, push
down hard on the handlebar(s) several times
and check if the front fork rebounds smoothly.
4-7
REAR WHEEL
EAS22020
REAR WHEEL
Removing the rear wheel, brake disc and rear wheel sprocket
T.
3
R.
33 Nm (3.3 m • kg, 24 ft • Ib)
4
9
(3)
6
8
LT
T.
R.
28 Nm (2.8 m • kg, 21 ft • Ib)
10
(6)
3
7
2
5
T.
R.
85 Nm (8.5 m • kg, 62 ft • Ib)
1
R.
Order
T.
LT
4 Nm (0.4 m • kg, 2.9 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Remarks
NOTE:
Use a suitable stand to raise the rear wheel off
the ground.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Drive chain case
Rear wheel axle nut
Drive chain adjusting plate
Rear wheel axle
Drive chain
Rear wheel assembly
Collar/dust cover
Collar/dust cover
Rear brake disc
Rear wheel sprocket
1
1
2
1
1
1
1/1
1/1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-8
REAR WHEEL
Disassembling the rear wheel
1 New
2
3
Order
1
2
3
2
New 1
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Oil seal
Wheel bearing
Spacer
Remarks
2
3
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-9
REAR WHEEL
Refer to “CHECKING THE TIRES” on page
3-23 and “CHECKING THE WHEELS” on
page 3-24.
3. Check:
● Spokes
Bends/damage → Replace.
Loose → Tighten.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL”
on page 4-4.
4. Measure:
● Radial rear wheel runout
● Lateral rear wheel runout
Refer to “CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL”
on page 4-4.
EAS22040
REMOVING THE REAR WHEEL (DISC)
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
EWA13120
WARNING
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the
rear wheel is elevated.
2. Elevate:
● Rear wheel
3. Remove:
● Drive chain case
● Rear wheel axle nut
● Drive chain adjusting plate “1”
● Rear wheel axle “2”
● Rear wheel “3”
Radial wheel runout limit
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Lateral wheel runout limit
2.0 mm (0.08 in)
EAS22120
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE REAR
WHEEL SPROCKET
1. Check:
● Rear wheel sprocket
More than 1/4 tooth “a” wear → Replace the
drive chain, drive sprocket, and rear wheel
sprocket as a set.
Bent teeth → Replace the drive chain, drive
sprocket, and rear wheel sprocket as a set.
3
1
2
1
NOTE:
a
Push the rear wheel forward and remove the
drive chain from the rear wheel sprocket.
2
EAS22080
DISASSEMBLING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Remove:
● Oil seals
● Wheel bearings
Refer to “DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT
WHEEL” on page 4-4.
b
a. 1/4 wear
b. Correct
EAS22100
1. Drive chain roller
2. Rear wheel sprocket
CHECKING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Check:
● Rear wheel axle
● Rear wheel
● Wheel bearings
● Oil seals
Refer to “CHECKING THE FRONT WHEEL”
on page 4-4.
2. Check:
● Tire
● Rear wheel
Damage/wear → Replace.
2. Replace:
● Rear wheel sprocket
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the self-locking nuts and the rear
wheel sprocket.
b. Clean the rear wheel drive hub with a clean
cloth, especially the surfaces that contact the
sprocket.
c. Install the new rear wheel sprocket.
4-10
REAR WHEEL
T.
R.
Rear wheel sprocket self-locking
nut
33 Nm (3.3 m•kg, 29 ft•lb)
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
3. Adjust:
● Drive chain slack
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN
SLACK” on page 3-20.
NOTE:
Tighten the self-locking nuts in stages and in a
crisscross pattern.
Drive chain slack
40.0–45.0 mm (1.57–1.77 in)
4. Tighten:
● Rear wheel axle nut
T.
R.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS22140
ASSEMBLING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Install:
● Wheel bearings
● Oil seals New
Refer to “ASSEMBLING THE FRONT
WHEEL” on page 4-5.
● Spacer
EAS22150
ADJUSTING THE REAR WHEEL STATIC
BALANCE
NOTE:
● After
replacing the tire, wheel or both, the rear
wheel static balance should be adjusted.
● Adjust the rear wheel static balance with the
brake disc and drive sprocket installed.
1. Adjust:
● Rear wheel static balance
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE FRONT WHEEL
STATIC BALANCE” on page 4-5.
EAS22160
INSTALLING THE REAR WHEEL
1. Install:
● Rear brake disc
Refer to “CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE
DISC” on page 4-29.
2. Lubricate:
● Rear wheel axle
● Oil seal lips
4-11
Rear wheel axle nut
85 Nm (8.5 m•kg, 62 ft•lb)
FRONT BRAKE
EAS22210
FRONT BRAKE
Removing the front brake pads
T.
R.
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)
2
4 5
1
3
S
T.
R.
32 Nm (3.2 m • kg, 23 ft • Ib)
5
Order
1
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Front brake caliper support bolt
1
Remarks
NOTE:
Remove the lower parts only.
NOTE:
2
Front brake caliper assembly
1
3
4
5
Front brake pad
Brake pad shim
Brake pad spring
2
1
2
Lift and remove the front brake caliper assembly.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-12
FRONT BRAKE
Removing the front brake master cylinder
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
7
1
10
8
9
11
S
2
S
3
5 New
S
6
T.
4
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
Order
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Drain the brake fluid
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Remarks
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
Right rear view mirror
Brake lever
Front brake light switch
Union bolt
Copper washer
Front brake hose
Brake master cylinder reservoir cap
Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm
holder
Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm
Front brake master cylinder holder
Front brake master cylinder
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-13
FRONT BRAKE
Disassembling the front brake master cylinder
BF
New 1
Order
1
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Master cylinder kit
Remarks
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-14
FRONT BRAKE
Removing the front brake calipers
T.
32 Nm (3.2 m • kg, 23 ft • Ib)
R.
T.
R.
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)
S
S
9
4
8
3
5
1
4
7
2 New
8
T.
R.
6
T.
R.
Order
Job/Parts to remove
32 Nm (3.2 m • kg, 23 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
Remarks
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
Drain the brake fluid
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
Union bolt
Copper washer
Front brake hose
Front brake caliper support bolt
Front brake caliper assembly
Front brake pad
Brake pad shim
Brake pad spring
Front brake caliper bracket
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-15
FRONT BRAKE
Disassembling the front brake calipers
T.
R.
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)
4
S
New 3
2 New
1
BF
Order
1
2
3
4
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Brake caliper piston
Brake caliper piston seal
Brake caliper dust seal
Bleed screw
Remarks
2
2
2
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-16
FRONT BRAKE
EAS22220
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
INTRODUCTION
a. Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that
the front wheel is elevated.
b. Before measuring the front brake disc deflection, turn the handlebar to the left or right to
ensure that the front wheel is stationary.
c. Remove the brake caliper.
d. Hold the dial gauge at a right angle against
the brake disc surface.
e. Measure the deflection at the point 13 mm
(front brake) or 14 mm (rear brake) below the
edge of brake disc.
EWA14100
WARNING
Disc brake components rarely require disassembly. Therefore, always follow these preventive measures:
● Never disassemble brake components unless absolutely necessary.
● If any connection on the hydraulic brake
system is disconnected, the entire brake
system must be disassembled, drained,
cleaned, properly filled, and bled after reassembly.
● Never use solvents on internal brake components.
● Use only clean or new brake fluid for cleaning brake components.
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up
any spilt brake fluid immediately.
● Avoid brake fluid coming into contact with
the eyes as it can cause serious injury.
FIRST AID FOR BRAKE FLUID ENTERING
THE EYES:
Flush with water for 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Measure:
● Brake disc thickness
Measure the brake disc thickness at a few different locations.
Out of specification → Replace.
Brake disc thickness limit
3.0 mm (0.12 in)
EAS22230
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE DISC
1. Remove:
● Front wheel
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL” on page 4-2.
2. Check:
● Front brake disc
Damage/galling → Replace.
3. Measure:
● Brake disc deflection
Out of specification → Correct the brake disc
deflection or replace the brake disc.
5. Adjust:
● Brake disc deflection
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the brake disc.
b. Turn the brake disc by one bolt hole.
c. Install the brake disc.
NOTE:
Tighten the brake disc bolts in stages and in a
crisscross pattern.
Brake disc deflection limit
0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
4-17
FRONT BRAKE
LT
T.
R.
2. Install:
● Brake pad shims
(onto the inner brake pads)
● Front brake pads
● Brake pad spring
Brake disc bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®)
NOTE:
Always install new brake pads, brake pad shims,
and a brake pad spring as a set.
d. Measure the brake disc deflection.
e. If out of specification, repeat the adjustment
steps until the brake disc deflection is within
specification.
f. If the brake disc deflection cannot be brought
within specification, replace the brake disc.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
6. Install:
● Front wheel
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL” on page 4-2.
a. Connect a clear plastic hose “1” tightly to the
bleed screw “2”. Put the other end of the hose
into an open container. The oil pan must be
under the hose end to receive the drain oil.
b. Loosen the bleed screw and push the brake
caliper pistons into the brake caliper with your
finger.
EAS22280
REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE PADS
NOTE:
When replacing the brake pads, it is not necessary to disconnect the brake hose or disassemble the brake caliper.
1
2
1. Measure:
● Brake pad wear limit “a”
Out of specification → Replace the brake
pads as a set.
c. Tighten the bleed screw.
T.
Brake pad lining thickness (inner)
5.3 mm (0.21 in)
Limit
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
Brake pad lining thickness (outer)
5.3 mm (0.21 in)
Limit
0.8 mm (0.03 in)
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 m•kg, 4.3 ft•lb)
R.
d. Install new brake pads, new brake pad
shims, and a new brake pad spring.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Lubricate:
● Front brake caliper support bolt
4-18
FRONT BRAKE
EAS22320
Front brake caliper support bolt
Silicone grease
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE
CALIPER
1. Remove:
● Brake caliper pistons “1”
● Brake caliper piston seals “2”
● Brake caliper dust seals “3”
ECA14150
CAUTION:
● Do
not allow grease to contact the brake
pads.
● Remove any excess grease.
2
4. Install:
● Front brake caliper
3
T.
Brake caliper support bolt
32 Nm (3.2 m•kg, 24 ft•lb)
1
R.
5. Check:
● Brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark “a” → Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” on page 3-17.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Blow compressed air into the brake hose joint
opening “a” to force out the pistons from the
brake caliper.
EWA13560
WARNING
● Cover
the brake caliper pistons with a rag.
Be careful not to get injured when the pistons are expelled from the brake caliper.
● Never try to pry out the brake caliper pistons.
a
a
6. Check:
● Brake fluid level
Soft or spongy feeling → Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
b. Remove the brake caliper piston seals and
dust seals.
EAS22290
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER
NOTE:
Before disassembling the brake caliper, drain
the brake fluid from the entire brake system.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
1. Remove:
● Union bolt
● Copper washers
● Brake hose
EAS22390
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER
Recommended brake component replacement
schedule
NOTE:
Put the end of the brake hose into a container
and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
4-19
Brake pads
If necessary
Piston seals / dust seals
Every two years
Brake hoses
Every four years
Brake fluid
Every four years and
whenever the brake is disassembled
FRONT BRAKE
Copper washers New
Front brake hose
● Union bolt
1. Check:
● Brake caliper pistons “1”
Rust/scratches/wear → Replace the brake
caliper pistons.
● Brake caliper cylinders “2”
Scratches/wear → Replace the brake caliper
assembly.
● Brake caliper body “3”
Cracks/damage → Replace the brake caliper
assembly.
● Brake fluid delivery passages
(brake caliper body)
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air.
●
●
T.
Front brake caliper bracket bolt
40 Nm (4.0 m•kg, 29 ft•lb)
Union bolt
30 Nm (3.0 m•kg, 22 ft•lb)
R.
EWA13530
WARNING
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe vehicle operation. Refer to “CABLE ROUTING” on page 2-25.
ECA14170
2
CAUTION:
3
When installing the brake hose onto the
brake caliper “1”, make sure the brake pipe
“a” touches the projection “b” on the brake
caliper.
1
b
a
EWA13610
WARNING
Whenever a brake caliper is disassembled,
replace the brake caliper piston seals.
1
2. Check:
● Brake caliper bracket
Cracks/damage → Replace.
2. Remove:
● Front brake caliper
3. Install:
● Brake pad springs
● Front brake pad
● Front brake caliper
● Brake caliper support bolt
Refer to “REPLACING THE FRONT BRAKE
PADS” on page 4-18.
EAS22400
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER
EWA13620
WARNING
● Before
T.
installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated
with clean or new brake fluid.
● Never use solvents on internal brake components as they will cause the piston seals
to swell and distort.
● Whenever a brake caliper is disassembled,
replace the brake caliper piston seals.
Brake caliper support bolt
32 Nm (3.2 m•kg, 23 ft•lb)
R.
4. Fill:
● Brake master cylinder reservoir
(with the specified amount of the recommended brake fluid)
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
EAS22420
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE CALIPER
1. Install:
● Front brake caliper bracket
● Front brake caliper
(temporarily)
EWA13090
WARNING
● Use
4-20
only the designated brake fluid. Other
FRONT BRAKE
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
brake performance.
● Refill with the same type of brake fluid that
is already in the system. Mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction, leading to poor brake performance.
● When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the brake fluid reservoir. Water
will significantly lower the boiling point of
the brake fluid and could cause vapor lock.
(from the brake switch)
NOTE:
Remove the master cylinder by pressing the
projection.
ECA13540
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up
any spilt brake fluid immediately.
5. Bleed:
● Brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
6. Check:
● Brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark “a” → Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” on page 3-17.
2. Remove:
● Union bolt
● Copper washers
● Front brake hose
NOTE:
To collect any remaining brake fluid, place a
container under the master cylinder and the end
of the brake hose.
EAS22500
CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
1. Check:
● Front brake master cylinder “1”
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace.
● Brake fluid delivery passages “2”
(brake master cylinder body)
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air.
a
1
7. Check:
● Brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling → Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
2
2. Check:
● Brake master cylinder kit “1”
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace.
3. Check:
● Brake master cylinder reservoir cap
● Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm
holder
● Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm
Cracks/damage → Replace.
4. Check:
EAS22490
REMOVING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
NOTE:
Before removing the front brake master cylinder,
drain the brake fluid from the entire brake system.
1. Disconnect:
● Front brake light switch “1”
4-21
FRONT BRAKE
●
Front brake hose
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace.
EAS22530
INSTALLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
1. Install:
● Front brake master cylinder “1”
EAS22520
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
EWA13520
WARNING
T.
R.
● Before
installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated
with clean or new brake fluid.
● Never use solvents on internal brake components.
Front brake master cylinder holder bolt
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
NOTE:
● Install
the brake master cylinder holder with the
“UP” mark facing up.
● Align the end of the brake master cylinder holder with the punch mark “a” on the handlebar.
● First, tighten the upper bolt, then the lower bolt.
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
1. Install:
● Cylinder cup “1” New
● Master cylinder piston “2”
Use the cylinder cup installer “3” for installation.
Cylinder cup installer
90890-01996
a
1
2. Install:
● Copper washers “1” New
● Brake hose “2”
● Union bolt “3”
T.
Union bolt
30 Nm (3.0 m•kg, 22 ft•lb)
R.
EWA13530
WARNING
2. Install:
● Master cylinder piston
● Circlip “1” New
● Dust boot “2”
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe vehicle operation. Refer to “CABLE ROUTING” on page 2-25.
NOTE:
● Hold
the brake hose, and tighten the union bolt
so that the hose comes within the angle as
shown.
● Turn the handlebar to the left and right to make
sure the brake hose does not touch other parts
(e.g., wire harness, cables, leads). Correct if
necessary.
4-22
FRONT BRAKE
1 New
a
15 25˚
3
2
6. Check:
● Brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling → Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
3. Fill:
● Brake master cylinder reservoir
(with the specified amount of the recommended brake fluid)
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
EWA13540
WARNING
● Use
only the designated brake fluid. Other
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
brake performance.
● Refill with the same type of brake fluid that
is already in the system. Mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction, leading to poor brake performance.
● When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the brake master cylinder reservoir. Water will significantly lower the boiling point of the brake fluid and could cause
vapor lock.
ECA13540
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up
any spilt brake fluid immediately.
4. Bleed:
● Brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
5. Check:
● Brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark “a” → Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” on page 3-17.
4-23
REAR BRAKE
EAS22550
REAR BRAKE
Removing the rear brake pads
T.
R.
3
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)
6
5
S
1
2
5
2
S
R.
17 Nm (1.7 m • kg, 12 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
T.
4
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Rear wheel
Rear brake caliper cover
Brake pad support bolt
Rear brake pad
Rear brake caliper bracket
Brake pad spring
Rear brake caliper assembly
Remarks
Refer to “REAR WHEEL” on page 4-8.
1
2
2
1
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-24
REAR BRAKE
Removing the rear brake master cylinder
T.
R.
13 Nm (1.3 m • kg, 9.4 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
New 2
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
1 3
5
6
7
T.
R.
13 Nm (1.3 m • kg, 9.4 ft • Ib)
8
New 4
Order
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Drain the brake fluid
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Remarks
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
Union bolt
Copper washer
Rear brake hose
Cotter pin
Brake master cylinder reservoir cap
Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm
holder
Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm
Rear brake master cylinder
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-25
REAR BRAKE
Disassembling the rear brake master cylinder
BF
S
New 1
T.
R.
Order
1
Job/Parts to remove
17 Nm (1.7 m • kg, 12 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
Master cylinder kit
Remarks
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-26
REAR BRAKE
Removing the rear brake calipers
T.
R.
26 Nm (2.6 m • kg, 19 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
14 Nm (1.4 m • kg, 10 ft • Ib)
9
6
2
8
3
4 New
1
S
8
5
7
5
S
T.
R.
17 Nm (1.7 m • kg, 12 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
Order
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Drain the brake fluid
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Remarks
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
Refer to “REAR WHEEL” on page 4-8.
Rear wheel
Rear brake caliper cover
Rear brake hose
Brake hose joint
Copper washer
Brake pad support bolt
Rear brake pad
Rear brake caliper bracket
Brake pad spring
Rear brake caliper assembly
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-27
REAR BRAKE
Disassembling the rear brake calipers
4
1
2 New
T.
R.
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)
3 New
Order
1
2
3
4
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Brake caliper piston
Brake caliper piston seal
Brake caliper dust seal
Bleed screw
Remarks
1
2
2
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-28
REAR BRAKE
EAS22560
Brake disc thickness limit
4.0 mm (0.16 in)
INTRODUCTION
EWA14100
WARNING
5. Adjust:
● Brake disc deflection
Refer to “CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE
DISC” on page 4-17.
T.
R.
Disc brake components rarely require disassembly. Therefore, always follow these preventive measures:
● Never disassemble brake components unless absolutely necessary.
● If any connection on the hydraulic brake
system is disconnected, the entire brake
system must be disassembled, drained,
cleaned, properly filled, and bled after reassembly.
● Never use solvents on internal brake components.
● Use only clean or new brake fluid for cleaning brake components.
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up
any spilt brake fluid immediately.
● Avoid brake fluid coming into contact with
the eyes as it can cause serious injury.
FIRST AID FOR BRAKE FLUID ENTERING
THE EYES:
Flush with water for 15 minutes and get immediate medical attention.
Brake disc bolt
28 Nm (2.8 m•kg, 21 ft•lb)
Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®)
6. Install:
● Rear wheel
Refer to “REAR WHEEL” on page 4-8.
EAS22580
REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE PADS
NOTE:
When replacing the brake pads, it is not necessary to disconnect the brake hose or disassemble the brake caliper.
1. Measure:
● Brake pad wear limit “a”
Out of specification → Replace the brake
pads as a set.
Brake pad lining thickness (inner)
5.2 mm (0.20 in)
Limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in)
Brake pad lining thickness (outer)
5.2 mm (0.20 in)
Limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in)
EAS22570
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE DISC
1. Remove:
● Rear wheel
Refer to “REAR WHEEL” on page 4-8.
2. Check:
● Rear brake disk
Damage/galling → Replace.
3. Measure:
● Brake disc deflection
Out of specification → Correct the brake disc
deflection or replace the brake disc.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE
DISC” on page 4-17.
a
Brake disc deflection limit
0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
4. Measure:
● Brake disc thickness
Measure the brake disc thickness at a few different locations.
Out of specification → Replace.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FRONT BRAKE
DISC” on page 4-17.
2. Lubricate:
● Support pin
(Rear brake caliper or rear brake caliper
bracket)
● Brake pad support bolt
4-29
REAR BRAKE
5. Check:
● Brake fluid level
Below minimum level mark “a” → Add the
recommended brake fluid to proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” on page 3-17.
Brake pad support bolt
Silicone grease
ECA14150
CAUTION:
● Do
not allow grease to contact the brake
pads.
● Remove any excess grease.
3. Install:
● Rear brake pad
● Brake pad spring
● Rear brake caliper bracket
a
NOTE:
Always install new brake pads, brake pad shims,
and a brake pad spring as a set.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
6. Check:
● Brake pedal operation
Soft or spongy feeling → Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
a. Connect a clear plastic hose “2” tightly to the
bleed screw “1”. Put the other end of the hose
into an open container. The oil pan must be
under the hose end to receive the drain oil.
b. Loosen the bleed screw and push the brake
caliper pistons into the brake caliper with your
finger.
EAS22590
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER
NOTE:
Before disassembling the brake caliper, drain
the brake fluid from the entire brake system.
2
1. Remove:
● Rear brake hose
● Brake hose joint
● Copper washers
1
NOTE:
Put the end of the brake hose into a container
and pump out the brake fluid carefully.
c. Tighten the bleed screw.
T.
Bleed screw
6 Nm (0.6 m•kg, 4.3 ft•lb)
EAS22600
R.
d. Install new brake pads and a new brake pad
spring.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Install:
● Brake pad support bolt
● Rear brake caliper cover
DISASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE
CALIPER
1. Remove:
● Brake caliper piston “1”
● Brake caliper piston seal “2”
● Brake caliper dust seal “3”
1
T.
R.
Brake pad support bolt
17 Nm (1.7 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
Rear brake caliper cover bolt
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
3
4-30
2
REAR BRAKE
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Blow compressed air into the brake hose joint
opening “a” to force out the piston from the
brake caliper.
3
EWA13560
WARNING
● Cover
the brake caliper pistons with a rag.
Be careful not to get injured when the pistons are expelled from the brake caliper.
● Never try to pry out the brake caliper pistons.
2
1
EWA13610
WARNING
Whenever a brake caliper is disassembled,
replace the brake caliper piston seals.
2. Check:
● Brake caliper brackets “1”
Cracks/damage → Replace.
a
EAS22650
ASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER
EWA13620
WARNING
b. Remove the brake caliper piston seal and
dust seal.
● Before
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS22640
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER
Recommended brake component
Replacement schedule
Brake pads
If necessary
Piston seal/dust seal
Every two years
Brake hoses
Every four years
Brake fluid
Every four years and
whenever the brake is disassembled
installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated
with clean or new brake fluid.
● Never use solvents on internal brake components as they will cause the piston seals
to swell and distort.
● Whenever a brake caliper is disassembled,
replace the brake caliper piston seals.
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
EAS22670
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE CALIPER
1. Install:
● Rear brake caliper
● Rear brake caliper bracket
2. Rear wheel
(temporarily)
Refer to “REAR WHEEL” on page 4-8.
3. Install:
● Copper washer “1” New
● Brake hose joint “2”
● Locknut “3”
● Rear brake hose “4”
1. Check:
● Brake caliper pistons “1”
Rust/scratches/wear → Replace the brake
caliper pistons.
● Brake caliper cylinders “2”
Scratches/wear → Replace the brake caliper
assembly.
● Brake caliper body “3”
Cracks/damage → Replace the brake caliper
assembly.
● Brake fluid delivery passages
(brake caliper body)
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air.
4-31
REAR BRAKE
T.
R.
brake performance.
with the same type of brake fluid that
is already in the system. Mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction, leading to poor brake performance.
● When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the brake fluid reservoir. Water
will significantly lower the boiling point of
the brake fluid and could cause vapor lock.
Brake hose joint (caliper side)
26 Nm (2.6 m•kg, 19 ft•lb)
Brake hose joint (hose side)
14 Nm (1.4 m•kg, 10 ft•lb)
● Refill
EWA13530
WARNING
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe vehicle operation. Refer to “CABLE ROUTING” on page 2-25.
ECA13540
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up
any spilt brake fluid immediately.
4
8. Bleed:
● Brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
9. Check:
● Brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark “a” → Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” on page 3-17.
3
2
1 New
4. Remove:
● Rear wheel
● Rear brake caliper bracket
● Rear brake caliper
5. Install:
● Brake pad springs
● Rear brake caliper bracket
● Rear brake pads
● Brake pad support bolts
● Brake caliper
Refer to “REPLACING THE REAR BRAKE
PADS” on page 4-29.
a
T.
Brake pad support bolt
17 Nm (1.7 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
R.
10.Check:
● Brake pedal operation
Soft or spongy feeling → Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
6. Install:
● Rear wheel
Refer to “REAR WHEEL” on page 4-8.
7. Fill:
(with the specified amount of the recommended brake fluid)
● Brake master cylinder reservoir
EAS22700
REMOVING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
Before disassembling the rear brake master cylinder, drain the brake fluid from the entire brake
system.
1. Remove:
● Union bolt
● Copper washers
● Brake hose
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
EWA13090
WARNING
● Use
only the designated brake fluid. Other
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
NOTE:
To collect any remaining brake fluid, place a
4-32
REAR BRAKE
container under the master cylinder and the end
of the brake hose.
Cylinder cup installer
90890-01996
EAS22710
CHECKING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
1. Check:
● Rear brake master cylinder “1”
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace.
● Brake fluid delivery passages “2”
(brake master cylinder body)
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air.
1
2. Assemble:
● Spring“1”
● Master cylinder piston “2”
● Adjusting rod “3”
● Circlip“4” New
● Dust boot“5”
2
2. Check:
● Brake master cylinder kit “1”
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace.
3. Check:
● Brake master cylinder reservoir cap
● Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm
holder
● Brake master cylinder reservoir diaphragm
Cracks/damage → Replace.
4. Check:
● Rear brake hose
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace.
EAS22750
INSTALLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
1. Install:
● Copper washers New
● Brake hoses
● Union bolt
EAS22730
ASSEMBLING THE REAR BRAKE MASTER
CYLINDER
EWA13520
T.
WARNING
Brake hose union bolt
30 Nm (3.0 m•kg, 22 ft•lb)
R.
● Before
installation, all internal brake components should be cleaned and lubricated
with clean or new brake fluid.
● Never use solvents on internal brake components.
EWA13530
WARNING
Proper brake hose routing is essential to insure safe vehicle operation. Refer to “CABLE ROUTING” on page 2-25.
ECA14160
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
CAUTION:
When installing the brake hose onto the
brake master cylinder, make sure the brake
pipe touches the projection “a” as shown.
1. Install:
● Cylinder cup “1” New
● Master cylinder piston “2”
Install it using with cylinder cup installer “3”.
4-33
REAR BRAKE
a
5. Check:
● Brake lever operation
Soft or spongy feeling → Bleed the brake
system.
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
2. Add the recommended brake fluid to the
proper level.
● Brake master cylinder reservoir
Recommended fluid
DOT 4
EWA13090
WARNING
● Use
only the designated brake fluid. Other
brake fluids may cause the rubber seals to
deteriorate, causing leakage and poor
brake performance.
● Refill with the same type of brake fluid that
is already in the system. Mixing brake fluids may result in a harmful chemical reaction, leading to poor brake performance.
● When refilling, be careful that water does
not enter the brake fluid reservoir. Water
will significantly lower the boiling point of
the brake fluid and could cause vapor lock.
ECA13540
CAUTION:
Brake fluid may damage painted surfaces
and plastic parts. Therefore, always clean up
any spilt brake fluid immediately.
3. Bleed:
● Brake system
Refer to “BLEEDING THE HYDRAULIC
BRAKE SYSTEM” on page 3-19.
4. Check:
● Brake fluid level
Below the minimum level mark “a” → Add the
recommended brake fluid to the proper level.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL” on page 3-17.
4-34
HANDLEBAR
EAS22840
HANDLEBAR
Removing the handlebar
T.
8
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
6
5
R.
6
T.
1
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
1
3
4
7
11
13
16
2
14
10
17
15
12
9
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Back view mirror
Front brake light switch
Front brake master cylinder holder
Front brake master cylinder assembly
Right handlebar switch
Throttle cable housing
Throttle cable
Throttle grip
Clutch cable
Clutch switch
Clutch lever holder
Clutch lever assembly
Left handlebar switch
Handlebar grip
Special washer
Handlebar holder
Handlebar
Remarks
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-35
HANDLEBAR
EAS22860
EAS22921
REMOVING THE HANDLEBARS
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
INSTALLING THE HANDLEBAR
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
EWA13120
EWA13120
WARNING
WARNING
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
2. Remove:
● Front brake light switch
● Clutch switch
2. Install:
● Handlebar “1”
● Upper handlebar holders “2”
NOTE:
T.
Release the key by pressing its projection, and
remove the handlebar from the master cylinder
assembly or clutch lever assembly.
Handlebar holder bolt
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
R.
EC3C51009
CAUTION:
First, tighten the bolts on the front side of the
handlebar holder, and then on the rear side.
NOTE:
● Align
mark “a” of the handlebar with the top
face of upper bracket.
● The upper handlebar holders should be installed with the arrow marks “b” facing forward
“A”.
2
3. Remove:
● Handlebar grip “1”
2
NOTE:
Blow compressed air between the handlebar
and the handlebar grip, and gradually push the
grip off the handlebar.
1
a
b
A
EAS22880
CHECKING THE HANDLEBAR
1. Check:
● Handlebar
Bends/cracks/damage → Replace.
3. Install:
● Special washer
● Handlebar grip
EWA13690
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent handlebar as this may dangerously weaken it.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Slightly coat the handlebar left end with a rubber adhesive.
b. Slide the handlebar grip over the left end of
the handlebar.
4-36
HANDLEBAR
c. Clean the excessive rubber adhesive with a
clean cloth. rubber adhesive
● Slightly
coat the end of slot cable and inside of
throttle grip with Yamaha Grease B. Then,
mount the throttle grip onto the handlebar.
EWA13700
WARNING
Do not touch the handlebar grip until the rubber adhesive has fully dried.
3
1. Install:
● Left handlebar switch “1”
2
a
b
1
NOTE:
● Align
tab “a” of special washer with slot “b” of
left handlebar switch.
● Align the matching surface of left handlebar
switch with mark “c” of the handlebar.
4. Install:
● Right handlebar switch “1”
1
c
NOTE:
Align projection “a” of the right handlebar switch
with hole “b” of the handlebar.
a
b
2. Install:
● Clutch lever assembly “1”
● Clutch lever holder “2”
1
NOTE:
b
Align the mating surfaces of the clutch lever
holder with the punch mark “a” on the handlebar.
1
a
5. Install:
● Front brake master cylinder assembly “1”
● Front brake master cylinder holder “2”
a
T.
R.
Front brake master cylinder assembly
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
NOTE:
● Install
the brake master cylinder holder with the
“UP” mark facing up.
● Align the matching surface of brake master cylinder holder with mark “a” of handlebar.
● Tighten the upper bolt first, and then tighten
the lower bolt.
2
3. Install:
● Throttle grip “1”
● Throttle cables “2”
● Throttle cable housing “3”
EWA13720
WARNING
Make sure the throttle grip operates smoothly.
NOTE:
● Align
projection “a” of slot cable housing with
hole “b” of the handlebar.
4-37
HANDLEBAR
1
a
2
6. Adjust:
● Clutch cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY” on page 3-12.
Clutch lever free play
10.0–15.0 mm (0.39–0.59 in)
7. Adjust:
● Throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY” on page 3-7
Throttle cable free play
3.0–5.0 mm (0.12–0.2 in)
4-38
FRONT FORK
EAS22950
FRONT FORK
Removing the front fork legs
T.
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
4
6
5
8
3
7
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
1
2
T.
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
T.
R.
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Front wheel
Brake hose holder
Front brake caliper
Mudguard
Upper bracket pinch bolt
Front fork cap bolt
Lower bracket pinch bolt
Fork leg
Dust boot
Remarks
Refer to “FRONT WHEEL” on page 4-2.
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
Loosen.
Loosen.
Loosen.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-39
FRONT FORK
Disassembling the front fork legs
T.
1
New 2
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
3
16
15
14
New 6
7
New 11
12
New 13
4
5
17
18
20
10
New 19
T.
New 9
R.
8
LT
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Front fork cap bolt
Cap bolt O-ring
Spacer
Spring seat
Fork spring
Dust seal
Oil seal clip
Damper rod bolt
Copper washer
Inner tube
Oil seal
Washer
Outer tube bushing
Oil flow stopper
Spacer
Spring
Damper rod
Rebound spring
Inner tube bushing
Outer tube
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4-40
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
Remarks
FRONT FORK
Disassembling the front fork legs
T.
1
New 2
R.
23 Nm (2.3 m • kg, 17 ft • Ib)
3
16
15
14
New 6
7
New 11
12
New 13
4
5
17
18
20
10
New 19
T.
New 9
R.
LT
Order
Job/Parts to remove
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
8
Q’ty
Remarks
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
4-41
FRONT FORK
EAS22970
EAS22980
REMOVING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
DISASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
1. Drain:
● Fork oil
EWA13120
WARNING
NOTE:
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
Stroke the outer tube several times while draining the fork oil.
NOTE:
Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the
front wheel is elevated.
2. Loosen:
● Upper bracket pinch bolt “1”
● Front fork cap bolt “2”
● Lower bracket pinch bolts “3”
EWA13640
WARNING
Before loosening the upper and lower bracket pinch bolts, support the front fork leg.
2. Remove:
● Dust seal “1”
● Oil seal clip “2”
(with a flat-head screwdriver)
2
ECA14180
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the inner tube.
1
3
3. Remove:
● Damper rod assembly bolt
● Copper washer
NOTE:
While holding the damper rod assembly with the
damper rod holder “1” and T-handle “2”, loosen
the damper rod bolt.
Damper rod holder
90890-01460
4-42
FRONT FORK
EWA13650
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent inner
tube as this may dangerously weaken it.
2. Measure:
● Spring free length “a”
Out of specification → Replace.
Fork spring free length
482.0 mm (18.98 in)
Limit
472.3 mm (18.59 in)
4. Remove:
● Inner tube
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Hold the front fork leg horizontally.
b. Securely clamp the brake caliper bracket in a
vise with soft jaws.
c. Separate the inner tube from the outer tube
by pulling the inner tube forcefully but carefully.
ECA14190
CAUTION:
● Excessive
force will damage the oil seal
and bushing. A damaged oil seal or bushing must be replaced.
● Avoid bottoming the inner tube into the
outer tube during the above procedure, as
the oil flow stopper will be damaged.
3. Check:
● Damper rod
Damage/wear → Replace.
Obstruction → Blow out all of the oil passages with compressed air.
● Oil flow stopper
Damage → Replace.
ECA14200
CAUTION:
● The
front fork leg has a built-in damper adjusting rod and a very sophisticated internal construction, which are particularly
sensitive to foreign material.
● When disassembling and assembling the
front fork leg, do not allow any foreign material to enter the front fork.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS23010
CHECKING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
1. Check:
● Inner tube
● Outer tube
Bends/damage/scratches → Replace.
4. Check:
● Cap bolt
Damage/wear → Replace.
EAS23020
ASSEMBLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
EWA13660
WARNING
● Make
sure the oil levels in both front fork
legs are equal.
● Uneven oil levels can result in poor handling and a loss of stability.
4-43
FRONT FORK
NOTE:
Damper rod holder
90890-01460
T-handle
90890-01326
T-handle 3/8" drive 60 cm long
YM-01326
● When
assembling the front fork leg, be sure to
replace the following parts:
● Inner tube bushing
● Outer tube bushing
● Oil seal
● Dust seal
● Before assembling the front fork leg, make
sure all of the components are clean.
1. Install:
● Inner tube bushing “1” New
● Damper rod “2”
● Rebound spring
● Spring “3”
● Spacer “4”
● Oil flow stopper “5”
EC3C51002
CAUTION:
4. Install:
● Outer tube bushing “1” New
● Washer “2”
(with the fork seal driver weight “3” and fork
seal driver attachment “4”)
Allow the damper rod assembly to slide
slowly down the inner tube “6” until it appears from the bottom of the inner tube. Be
careful not to damage the inner tube.
4
Fork seal driver weight
90890-01367
Replacement hammer
YM-A9409-7
Fork seal driver attachment (ø35)
90890-01369
Replacement 35 mm
YM-A9409-5
3
6
5
2
1
New
2. Lubricate:
● Inner tube’s outer surface
Recommended oil
Yamaha fork oil 15WT
3. Tighten:
● Damper rod bolt “1”
T.
R.
Damper rod bolt
18 Nm (1.8 m•kg, 13 ft•lb)
LOCTITE®204
Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®)
5. Install:
● Oil seal “1” New
(with the fork seal driver weight “2” and fork
seal driver attachment “3”)
ECA14220
NOTE:
CAUTION:
While holding the damper rod assembly with the
damper rod holder “2” and T-handle “3”, tighten
the damper rod assembly bolt.
Make sure the numbered side of the oil seal
faces up.
NOTE:
● Before
installing the oil seal, lubricate its lips
with lithium soap base grease.
4-44
FRONT FORK
● Lubricate
the outer surface of the inner tube
with fork oil.
● Before installing the oil seal, cover the top of
the front fork leg with a plastic bag to protect
the oil seal during installation.
8. Fill:
● Front fork leg
(with the specified amount of the recommended fork oil)
Quantity
385.0 cm3 (13.02 US oz) (13.58
Imp.oz)
Recommended oil
Yamaha fork oil 15WT
Level
125.0 mm (4.92 in)
At position “a” from the inner
tube top end when the inner tube
is fully compressed in the outer
tube
6. Install:
● Oil seal clip “1”
NOTE:
NOTE:
● While
filling the front fork leg, keep it upright.
filling, slowly pump the front fork leg up
and down to distribute the fork oil.
Adjust the oil seal clip so that it fits into the outer
tube’s groove.
● After
7. Install:
● Dust seal “1”
(with the fork seal driver weight “2”)
Fork seal driver weight
90890-01367
Replacement hammer
YM-A9409-7
9. Install:
● Fork spring
● Spring seat
● Spacer
● Front fork cap bolt
NOTE:
● Before
installing the cap bolt, lubricate its
O-ring with grease.
● Temporarily tighten the cap bolt.
4-45
FRONT FORK
EAS23050
INSTALLING THE FRONT FORK LEGS
The following procedure applies to both of the
front fork legs.
1. Install:
● Dust boot
● Clamp screw
(temporarily)
2. Install:
● Front fork leg
Temporarily tighten the upper and lower
bracket pinch bolts.
1
NOTE:
2
The inner tube top face must match the upper
bracket top face.
3
4. Install:
● Dust boots “1”
● Clamp screw
NOTE:
Direct air-bleeding hole “a” of the dust boot outward of the vehicle, and press and assemble the
dust boot top end to the lower bracket.
3. Tighten:
● Lower bracket pinch bolt “1”
T.
Lower bracket pinch bolt
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
R.
●
Front fork cap bolt “2”
T.
Front fork cap bolt
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
R.
●
1
Upper bracket pinch bolt “3”
a
T.
Upper bracket pinch bolt
23 Nm (2.3 m•kg, 17 ft•lb)
R.
EWA13680
WARNING
Make sure the brake hoses are routed properly.
4-46
STEERING HEAD
EAS23090
STEERING HEAD
Removing the head light unit, meter assembly and front fender
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
3 Nm (0.3 m • kg, 2.2 ft • Ib)
3 5
4
2
7
1
4
5
6
9
(4)
T.
R.
8
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
11
T.
R.
2 Nm (0.2 m • kg, 1.4 ft • Ib)
10
(4)
T.
R.
T.
R.
T.
R.
Order
Job/Parts to remove
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
Remarks
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page
4-1.
Refer to “FUEL TANK” on page 6-1.
Refer to “HANDLEBAR” on page 4-35.
Refer to “FRONT FORK” on page 4-39.
Tool box
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
Fuel tank
Handlebar
Fork leg
Head light cowling
Headlight unit
Headlight coupler
Turn signal light connector
Front turn signal light/rear turn signal light
Meter assembly coupler
Meter assembly
Brake hose holder
Head light unit stay
Front fender
Brake hose holder bracket
1
1
1
2
1/1
3
1
1
1
1
1
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-47
STEERING HEAD
Removing the lower bracket
T.
R.
110 Nm (11 m • kg, 80 ft • Ib)
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
9
10
11
13
8
13
38 Nm (3.8 m • kg, 28 ft • Ib)
Return fully
2nd 4 Nm (0.4 m • kg, 2.9 ft • Ib)
1st
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
R
Order
T.
12
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Headlight unit/meter assembly/front fender
Main switch coupler
Steering stem nut
Upper bracket
Lock washer
Upper ring nut
Rubber washer
Lower ring nut
Lower bracket
Bearing cover
Washer
Upper bearing
Lower bearing
Bearing races
Remarks
Refer to “STEERING HEAD” on page 4-47.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-48
STEERING HEAD
b. Remove the bearing from the lower bracket
with a floor chisel “2” and hammer.
c. Install new bearing races.
EAS23110
REMOVING THE LOWER BRACKET
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
EWA13120
ECA14270
WARNING
CAUTION:
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
If the bearing race is not installed properly,
the steering head pipe could be damaged.
2. Remove:
● Upper ring nut
● Rubber washer
● Lower ring nut “1”
NOTE:
Always replace the bearings and bearing races
as a set.
NOTE:
Remove both upper and lower ring nuts using
the ring nut wrench.
Ring nut wrench
90890-01268
Spanner wrench
YU-01268
EWA13730
WARNING
Securely support the lower bracket so that
there is no danger of it falling.
1
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Check:
● Upper bracket
● Lower bracket
(along with the steering stem)
Bends/cracks/damage → Replace.
EAS23120
CHECKING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Wash:
● Bearings
● Bearing races
Recommended cleaning solvent
Kerosene
EAS23140
INSTALLING THE STEERING HEAD
1. Lubricate:
● Upper bearing
● Lower bearing
● Bearing races
2. Check:
● Bearings
● Bearing races
Damage/pitting → Replace.
3. Replace:
● Bearings
● Bearing races
Recommended lubricant
Lithium-soap-based grease
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the bearing races from the steering
head pipe with a long rod “1” and hammer.
4-49
2. Install:
● Lower bracket
● Lower ring nut “1”
● Rubber washer “2”
STEERING HEAD
●
●
Upper ring nut “3”
Lock washer “4”
Refer to “CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
THE STEERING HEAD” on page 3-21.
NOTE:
Portion “a” having the large tapered area must
face downward when the lower ring nut is
mounted.
a
4
3
2
1
3. Install:
● Upper bracket
● Steering stem nut
NOTE:
Temporarily tighten the steering stem nut.
4. Install:
● Front fork legs
Refer to “FRONT FORK” on page 4-39.
NOTE:
Temporarily tighten the lower bracket pinch
bolts.
5. Tighten:
● Steering stem nut
T.
Steering stem nut
110 Nm (11.0 m•kg, 80 ft•lb)
R.
4-50
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
EAS23160
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
Removing the rear shock absorber assembly
T.
M
R.
50 Nm (5.0 m • kg, 36 ft • Ib)
M
M
3
1
T.
R.
7
7
T.
R.
50 Nm (5.0 m • kg, 36 ft • Ib)
9
5
M
6
7
4
2
8
7
7
7
M
M
T.
R.
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
59 Nm (5.9 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
Remarks
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page
4-1.
Rear left side cover/rear right side cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
9
9
M
Order
40 Nm (4.0 m • kg, 29 ft • Ib)
Connecting arm
Relay arm
Rear shock absorber assembly
Spacer
Spacer
Spacer
Oil seal
Bearing
Bushing
2
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
3
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-51
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
EAS23180
HANDLING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
NOTE:
Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the
rear wheel is elevated.
EWA13740
WARNING
This rear shock absorber contains highly
compressed nitrogen gas. Before handling
the rear shock absorber, read and make sure
you understand the following information.
The manufacturer cannot be held responsible for property damage or personal injury
that may result from improper handling of
the rear shock absorber.
● Do not tamper or attempt to open the rear
shock absorber.
● Do not subject the rear shock absorber to
an open flame or any other source of high
heat. High heat can cause an explosion due
to excessive gas pressure.
● Do not deform or damage the rear shock
absorber in any way. Rear shock absorber
damage will result in poor damping performance.
EAS23240
CHECKING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
1. Check:
● Rear shock absorber rod
Bends/damage → Replace the rear shock
absorber assembly.
● Rear shock absorber
Gas leaks/oil leaks → Replace the rear shock
absorber assembly.
● Spring
Damage/wear → Replace the rear shock absorber assembly.
● Bushings
Damage/wear → Replace.
● Bolts
Bends/damage/wear → Replace.
EAS23260
CHECKING THE CONNECTING ARM AND
RELAY ARM
1. Check:
● Connecting arms
● Relay arm
Damage/wear → Replace.
2. Check:
● Bearings
● Oil seals
● Bushing
Damage/pitting → Replace.
3. Check:
● Spacers
Damage/scratches → Replace.
EAS23190
DISPOSING OF A REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
1. Gas pressure must be released before disposing of a rear shock absorber. To release
the gas pressure, drill a 2–3-mm hole through
the rear shock absorber at a point 60 mm
from its end as shown.
EWA13760
WARNING
Wear eye protection to prevent eye damage
from released gas or metal chips.
EAS23270
INSTALLING THE RELAY ARM
1. Lubricate:
● Spacers
● Bearings
● Oil seal
Recommended lubricant
Lithium soap base grease
EAS23230
REMOVING THE REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
2. Install:
● Bearing “1”
(to the relay arm “2”)
● Bushing “3”
to relay arm “2”
EWA13120
WARNING
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
4-52
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
Installed depth “a”
4.5 mm
Installed depth “b”
3 mm
Installed depth “c”
4 mm
3
2
1
b
c
3
a
b
3
EAS23310
INSTALLING THE REAR SHOCK
ABSORBER ASSEMBLY
1. Install:
● Rear shock absorber assembly
NOTE:
Install the rear shock absorber by facing its valve
backward.
2. Tighten:
● Rear shock absorber assembly upper nut
T.
R.
●
Rear shock absorber assembly
upper nut
50 Nm (5.0 m•kg, 36 ft•lb)
Relay arm nut (frame side)
T.
Relay-arm nut (frame side)
50 Nm (5.0 m•kg, 36 ft•lb)
R.
●
Rear shock absorber assembly lower nut
T.
R.
●
Connecting arm nut (relay-arm side)
T.
R.
●
Rear shock absorber assembly
lower nut
40 Nm (4.0 m•kg, 29 ft•lb)
Connecting arm nut (relay-arm
side)
59 Nm (5.9 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Connecting arm nut (swingarm side)
T.
R.
Connecting arm nut (swingarm
side)
59 Nm (5.9 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
4-53
SWINGARM
EAS23330
SWINGARM
Removing the swingarm
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
3
1
M
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
4
LT
11
6
M
9
12
7
M
M
10
9
8
12
5
11
M
7
2
T.
R.
Order
80 Nm (8.0 m • kg, 58 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Rear wheel
Refer to “REAR WHEEL” on page 4-8.
Refer to “REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
ASSEMBLY” on page 4-51.
Rear shock absorber assembly
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Remarks
Brake hose holder
Pivot shaft nut
Pivot shaft
Swingarm
Front drive chain guide
Rear drive chain guide
Dust cover
Spacer
Bushing
Spacer
Oil seal
Bushing
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-54
SWINGARM
EAS23350
EAS23360
REMOVING THE SWINGARM
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
CHECKING THE SWINGARM
1. Check:
● Swingarm
Bends/cracks/damage → Replace.
2. Check:
● Pivot shaft
Roll the pivot shaft on a flat surface.
Bends → Replace.
EWA13120
WARNING
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the
rear wheel is elevated.
EWA13770
WARNING
2. Measure:
● Swingarm side play
● Swingarm vertical movement
Do not attempt to straighten a bent pivot
shaft.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Measure the tightening torque of the pivot
shaft nut.
T.
Pivot shaft nut
80 Nm (8.0 m•kg, 58 ft•lb)
R.
b. Measure the swingarm side play “A” by moving the swingarm from side to side.
c. If the swingarm side play is out of specification, check the spacers, bearings, washers,
and dust covers.
3. Wash:
● Pivot shaft
● Dust covers
● Spacer
● Washers
● Bushing
Swingarm up/down stroke limit at
rear end position of the rear arm
1.0 mm
Swing arm play limit on the pivot
shaft
1.0 mm
Recommended cleaning solvent
Kerosene
d. Check the swingarm vertical movement “B”
by moving the swingarm up and down.
If swingarm vertical movement is not smooth
or if there is binding, check the spacers,
spacers, washers, and dust covers.
4. Check:
● Dust covers
● Spacer
● Washers
● Oil seals
Damage/wear → Replace.
● Bushing
Damage/pitting → Replace.
EAS23380
INSTALLING THE SWINGARM
1. Lubricate:
● Bushing
● Spacers
● Dust covers
● Pivot shaft
B
A
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide grease
2. Install:
● Bushing “1”
4-55
SWINGARM
●
●
Oil seal “2”
Spacer “3”
(to the swingarm “4”)
Installed depth “a”
3 mm
2
a
2
1
3
4
a
3. Install:
● Rear shock absorber assembly
● Rear wheel
Refer to “REAR SHOCK ABSORBER ASSEMBLY” on page 4-51 and “REAR WHEEL”
on page 4-8.
4. Adjust:
● Drive chain slack
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN
SLACK” on page 3-20.
Drive chain slack
40.0–45.0 mm (1.57–1.77 in)
4-56
CHAIN DRIVE
EAS23400
CHAIN DRIVE
Removing the drive chain
5
4
T.
R.
110 Nm (11 m • kg, 80 ft • Ib)
1
New 3
2
T.
R.
Order
1
2
3
4
5
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Swingarm
Drive sprocket cover
Drive sprocket nut
Lock washer
Drive sprocket
Drive chain
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
Remarks
Refer to “SWINGARM” on page 4-54.
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
4-57
CHAIN DRIVE
EAS23420
REMOVING THE DRIVE CHAIN
1. Stand the vehicle on a level surface.
EWA13120
WARNING
Securely support the vehicle so that there is
no danger of it falling over.
NOTE:
Place the vehicle on a suitable stand so that the
rear wheel is elevated.
2. Remove:
● Drive sprocket nut “1”
● Lock washer “2”
b. Calculate the length “c” of the 15-link section,
push down on the drive chain to increase its
tension.
Drive chain 15-link section length “c” =
(length “a” between pin inner sides + length
“b” between pin outer sides)/2
NOTE:
● Straighten
the lock washer tab.
the rear brake, and loosen the drive
sprocket.
● After loosening the drive sprocket, remove the
rear wheel and swingarm.
● Operate
1
2
NOTE:
● When
measuring a 15-link section of the drive
chain, make sure that the drive chain is taut.
● Perform this procedure 2–3 times, at a different
location each time.
3. Remove:
● Swingarm
Refer to “SWINGARM” on page 4-54.
EAS23441
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
CHECKING THE DRIVE CHAIN
1. Measure:
● 15-link section “a” of the drive chain
Out of specification → Replace the drive
chain.
2. Check:
● Drive chain
Stiffness → Clean, lubricate, or replace.
15-link length limit
191.5 mm (7.54 in)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Measure the length “a” between the inner
sides of the pins and the length “b” between
the outer sides of the pins on a 15-link section
of the drive chain as shown in the illustration.
3. Clean:
● Drive chain
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Wipe the drive chain with a clean cloth.
4-58
CHAIN DRIVE
5. Lubricate:
● Drive chain
b. Put the drive chain in kerosene and remove
any remaining dirt.
c. Remove the drive chain from the kerosene
and completely dry it.
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil or chain lubricant
suitable for O-ring chains
EC3C51003
CAUTION:
This vehicle has a drive chain with small rubber O-rings “1” between the drive chain side
plates. Steam cleaning, high-pressure washing, certain solvents, and the use of a coarse
brush can damage these O-rings.
EAS23460
CHECKING THE DRIVE SPROCKET
1. Check:
● Drive sprocket
Refer to “CHECKING AND REPLACING
THE REAR WHEEL SPROCKET” on page
4-10.
EAS23490
INSTALLING THE DRIVE CHAIN
1. Lubricate:
● Drive chain
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil or chain lubricant
suitable for O-ring chains
2. Install:
● Drive chain
● Drive sprocket “1”
● Lock washer “2” New
● Drive sprocket nut “3”
(temporarily)
NOTE:
While applying the drive sprocket, tighten the
drive sprocket nut.
1
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Check:
● O-rings “1”
Damage → Replace the drive chain.
● Drive chain rollers “2”
Damage/wear → Replace the drive chain.
● Drive chain side plates “3”
Damage/wear → Replace the drive chain.
Cracks → Replace the drive chain.
New 2
3
3. Install:
● Swingarm
Refer to “SWINGARM” on page 4-54.
● Rear wheel
Refer to “REAR WHEEL” on page 4-8.
4. Install:
● Lock washer “1”
● Drive sprocket “2”
T.
R.
4-59
Drive sprocket nut
110 Nm (11.0 m•kg, 80 ft•lb)
CHAIN DRIVE
NOTE:
● Tighten
the drive sprocket nut by applying the
rear drive.
● Be sure to bend the lock washer tab along to
the nut side face.
2
1
5. Adjust:
● Drive chain slack
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE DRIVE CHAIN
SLACK” on page 3-20
Drive chain slack
40.0–45.0 mm (1.57–1.77 in)
ECA13550
CAUTION:
A drive chain that is too tight will overload
the engine and other vital parts, and one that
is too loose can skip and damage the swingarm or cause an accident. Therefore, keep
the drive chain slack within the specified limits.
4-60
ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL .......................................................................................5-1
INSTALLING THE ENGINE .....................................................................5-4
INSTALLING THE SHIFT PEDAL ............................................................5-4
CYLINDER HEAD ..........................................................................................5-6
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD .......................................................5-8
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD ........................................................5-9
CHECKING THE TAPPET COVERS AND
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET COVER ........................................................5-9
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET AND
TIMING CHAIN GUIDE (EXHAUST SYSTEM SIDE)............................5-9
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER ......................................5-10
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD ......................................................5-10
CAMSHAFT....................................................................................................5-13
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT ............................5-14
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT .................................................................5-14
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND ROCKER ARM SHAFTS .........5-15
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND ROCKER ARMS ...........................5-15
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS ..................................................................5-17
REMOVING THE VALVES.......................................................................5-18
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE GUIDES ...................................5-18
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS.............................................................5-20
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS ........................................................5-21
INSTALLING THE VALVES .....................................................................5-23
CYLINDER AND PISTON ..............................................................................5-25
REMOVING THE PISTON .......................................................................5-26
CHECKING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON ............................................5-26
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS ...........................................................5-27
CHECKING THE PISTON PIN.................................................................5-28
INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDER ..........................................5-28
CLUTCH .........................................................................................................5-30
REMOVING THE CLUTCH ......................................................................5-33
CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATES .....................................................5-33
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATES........................................................5-33
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRINGS .....................................................5-33
CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING.....................................................5-34
CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS............................................................5-34
CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE .....................................................5-34
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PUSH RODS ................................................5-34
CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR..............................................5-34
CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVEN GEAR ...........................................5-34
INSTALLING THE CLUTCH.....................................................................5-34
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
OIL PUMP AND BALANCER GEAR .............................................................5-38
REMOVING THE BALANCER GEAR ......................................................5-40
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP ....................................................................5-40
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER ............................................................5-40
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP................................................................5-41
INSTALL THE OIL PUMP AND BALANCER GEAR ................................5-41
SHIFT SHAFT ................................................................................................5-43
CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT ..............................................................5-44
CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER .......................................................5-44
INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT ............................................................5-44
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH ......................................................5-45
REMOVING THE GENERATOR..............................................................5-47
REMOVING THE STARTER CLUTCH ....................................................5-47
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH.....................................................5-47
INSTALLING THE STARTER CLUTCH...................................................5-48
INSTALLING THE GENERATOR ............................................................5-48
ELECTRIC STARTER...................................................................................5-50
CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR ......................................................5-52
ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR..................................................5-53
CRANKCASE.................................................................................................5-54
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE ....................................................5-56
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE...............................................................5-56
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN, CRANKSHAFT
SPROCKET, TIMING CHAIN GUIDE (INTAKE SIDE)..........................5-56
CHECKING THE BEARING AND OIL SEAL ...........................................5-56
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE ..........................................................5-56
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY..........................................................................5-58
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY........................................5-59
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND CONNECTING ROD ..................5-59
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY ......................................5-59
TRANSMISSION ............................................................................................5-61
CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS .............................................................5-63
CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY...........................................5-63
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION..........................................................5-63
INSTALLING THE SHIFT FORKS AND SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY .......5-64
ENGINE REMOVAL
EAS23710
ENGINE REMOVAL
Removing the exhaust pipe
T.
R.
42 Nm (4.2 m • kg, 30 ft • Ib)
1
New
3 New
T.
R.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 15 ft • Ib)
2
T.
R.
42 Nm (4.2 m • kg, 30 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
Order
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Remarks
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page
4-1.
Rear right side cover
1
2
3
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
Muffler
Exhaust pipe
Exhaust pipe gasket
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-1
ENGINE REMOVAL
Removing the shift pedal assembly and leads and hoses
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
3
5
1
2
4
6
T.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
R.
8
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
7
T.
R.
Order
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Carburetor
Drive sprocket
Starter motor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Cylinder head breather hose
Spark plug cap
Clutch cable
Pickup coil coupler/stator assembly coupler
Speed sensor coupler
Horn
Shift pedal assembly
Neutral switch lead
5-2
1
1
1
1/1
1
1
1
1
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
Remarks
Refer to “CARBURETOR” on page 6-3.
Refer to “CHAIN DRIVE” on page 4-57.
Refer to “ELECTRIC STARTER” on page
5-50.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
ENGINE REMOVAL
Removing the engine
T.
R.
T.
R.
44 Nm (4.4 m • kg, 32 ft • Ib)
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
3
T.
R.
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
4
2
12
1
2
11
10
7
9
T.
R.
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
Order
8
5
6
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Remarks
NOTE:
Use an appropriate vehicle stand and support
the engine securely.
Refer to “CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL” on
page 3-11.
Drain the engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Engine mounting bolt (upper side)
Engine bracket bolt
Right engine bracket
Left engine bracket
Engine mounting bolts (front upper side)
Engine mounting bolt (front lower side)
Down tube bolts (front side)
Down tube bolts (rear side)
Down tube
Engine mounting bolt (rear lower side)
Engine mounting bolt (rear upper side)
Engine assembly
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the removal procedure.
5-3
ENGINE REMOVAL
EAS23720
●
Down tube nut (front)
T.
INSTALLING THE ENGINE
1. Install:
● Engine assembly “1”
● Engine mounting bolt (rear upper side)“2”
● Engine mounting bolt (rear lower side)“3”
● Down tube “4”
● Down tube bolt (Rear)“5”
● Down tube bolt (Front)“6”
● Engine mounting bolt (front lower side)“7”
● Engine mounting bolts (front upper side)“8”
● Left engine bracket “9”
● Right engine bracket “10”
● Engine bracket bolt “11”
● Engine mounting bolt (upper side)“12”
Down tube nut (front)
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
R.
●
Engine mounting nut (front upper)
T.
R.
●
Engine mounting nut (front upper)
T.
R.
NOTE:
●
The bolts and nuts must be tightened temporarily in this stage.(Temporarily tighten)
Engine mounting nut (front upper)
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Engine mounting nut (front upper)
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
Engine bracket nut
T.
Engine bracket nut
44 Nm (4.0 m•kg, 32 ft•lb)
R.
●
10
T.
11
12
Engine mounting nut (upper)
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
R.
9
Engine mounting nut (upper)
2
EAS3C51004
11
1
INSTALLING THE SHIFT PEDAL
1. Install:
● Shift pedal assembly “1”
3
T.
R.
Shift pedal bolt
30 Nm (3.0 m•kg, 22 ft•lb)
Shift arm bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
6
NOTE:
Align mark “a” of the shift shaft with mark “b” of
the shift arm.
4
8
7
5
a
b
2. Tighten:
● Engine mounting nut (rear upper)
1
T.
Engine mounting nut (rear upper)
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
R.
●
Engine mounting nut (rear lower)
T.
Engine mounting nut (rear lower)
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
R.
2. Adjust:
● Shift pedal position
●
NOTE:
Down tube nut (rear)
T.
Loosen the lock nut “1” and turn shift rod “2” so
that height “a” from the footrest to the shift pedal
top face comes within 16 to 22 mm (0.63 to 0.79
Down tube nut (rear)
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
R.
5-4
ENGINE REMOVAL
in). When this adjustment is complete, tighten
the locknut “1”.
T.
Locknut
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
R.
a
1
2 1
5-5
CYLINDER HEAD
EAS24100
CYLINDER HEAD
Removing the cylinder head
T.
R.
T.
R.
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
15
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4
12
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
TLTL
New
T.
R.
6 5
New
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
9
T.
R.
New
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
22 Nm (2.2 m • kg, 16 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
13
14
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
7
T.
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
R.
New
New
New
18
(4)
T.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 15 ft • Ib)
10
E
R.
1
New
11
M
8
21
20
20 17
16
New
New
2
New
19 New
R.
R.
Order
T.
T.
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
3
Remarks
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page
4-1.
Refer to “FUEL TANK” on page 6-1.
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” on page 5-1.
Tool box
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
New
Fuel tank
Left engine bracket/Right engine bracket
Spark plug
Timing mark accessing screw
Crankshaft end cover
Camshaft sprocket cover
Breather plate
Breather plate gasket
Intake tappet cover
Exhaust tappet cover
Camshaft sprocket bolt
Timing chain tensioner
Timing chain tensioner gasket
Camshaft sprocket plate
Camshaft sprocket
Dowel pin
Intake manifold
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
5-6
CYLINDER HEAD
Removing the cylinder head
T.
R.
T.
R.
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
15
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
4
12
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
TLTL
New
T.
R.
6 5
New
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
9
T.
R.
New
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
22 Nm (2.2 m • kg, 16 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
13
14
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
7
T.
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
R.
New
New
New
18
(4)
T.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 15 ft • Ib)
10
E
R.
1
New
11
M
8
21
20
20 17
16
New
New
2
New
16
17
18
19
20
21
19 New
R.
R.
Order
T.
T.
18 Nm (1.8 m • kg, 13 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
Air induction system pipe
Air induction system pipe gasket
Cylinder head
Cylinder head gasket
Dowel pin
Timing chain guide (exhaust side)
New
3
Remarks
1
1
1
1
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-7
CYLINDER HEAD
EAS24130
REMOVING THE CYLINDER HEAD
1. Disconnect:
● Wire harness
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Loosen:
● Camshaft sprocket bolt
NOTE:
Disconnect the wire harness from the T-stud of
vehicle frame.
NOTE:
Tighten the generator rotor bolts but loosen the
camshaft sprocket bolts using a wrench.
2. Align:
● Mark “a” of the camshaft sprocket
(with mark “b” of the cylinder head)
4. Remove:
● Timing chain tensioner
(along with the gasket)
● Camshaft sprocket plate
● Camshaft sprocket
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise.
b. When the piston is in the compression stroke,
align camshaft sprocket mark “a” with cylinder head mark “b”. (Compression stroke
TDC)
NOTE:
To prevent the timing chain from falling into the
crankcase, fasten it with a wire.
NOTE:
5. Remove:
● Cylinder head
Make sure that generator rotor mark “c” aligns
with generator rotor cover mark “d”.
NOTE:
● Loosen
the cylinder head bolts in the correct
sequence as shown.
● Loosen each cylinder head bolt for a half turn
at a time. When all cylinder head bolts are fully
loosened, remove them.
5-8
CYLINDER HEAD
head several times.
4
1
6
2
2
1
5
3
EAS24160
CHECKING THE CYLINDER HEAD
1. Eliminate:
● Combustion chamber carbon deposits
(with a rounded scraper)
e. When the cylinder head warpage is out of
specification after resurfacing, replace the
cylinder head.
NOTE:
Do not use a sharp instrument to avoid damaging or scratching:
● Spark plug bore threads
● Valve seats
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS23940
CHECKING THE TAPPET COVERS AND
CAMSHAFT SPROCKET COVER
The following procedure applies to both of the
tappet covers and O-rings.
1. Check:
● Tappet cover
● Camshaft sprocket cover
EAS3C51005
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT SPROCKET
AND TIMING CHAIN GUIDE (EXHAUST
SYSTEM SIDE)
Check the camshaft sprocket and the timing
chain guide (exhaust system side) as follows.
1. Check:
● Camshaft sprocket
Wear of 1/4 or more teeth “a” → Replace the
camshaft sprocket as a set, timing chain, and
crankshaft sprocket.
2. Check:
● Cylinder head
Damage/scratches → Replace.
3. Measure:
● Cylinder head warpage
Out of specification → Resurface the cylinder
head.
Warpage limit
0.03 mm (0.0012 in)
a
b
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Place a straightedge “1” and a thickness
gauge “2” across the cylinder head.
b. Measure the warpage.
c. If the limit is exceeded, resurface the cylinder
head as follows.
d. Place a 400–600 grit wet sandpaper on the
surface plate and resurface the cylinder head
using a figure-eight sanding pattern.
a. 1/4 tooth wear
b. Normal
1. Timing chain
2. Camshaft sprocket
NOTE:
To ensure an even surface, turn the cylinder
5-9
1
2
CYLINDER HEAD
● Tighten
the cylinder head bolts in two stages in
the correct sequence as shown.
2. Check:
● Timing chain guide (exhaust side)
Crack/wear → Replace.
EAS24200
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN TENSIONER
1. Check:
● Timing chain tensioner
Cracks/damage/rough movement → Replace.
3
1
5
6
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
2
a. Lightly press the timing chain tensioner rod
into the timing chain tensioner housing by
hand.
4
2. Install:
● Dowel pin
● Camshaft sprocket
● Timing chain
NOTE:
While pressing the timing chain tensioner rod,
wind it clockwise with a thin screwdriver “1” until
it stops.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
b. Remove the screwdriver and slowly release
the timing chain tensioner rod.
c. Make sure that the timing chain tensioner rod
comes out of the timing chain tensioner housing smoothly. If there is rough movement, replace the timing chain tensioner.
a. Make sure that generator rotor mark “a”
aligns with generator rotor cover mark “b”. If
not, align them by turning the crankshaft
counterclockwise.
1
b. Align camshaft sprocket mark “c” with cylinder head mark “d”.
c. Install the timing chain onto the camshaft
sprocket, and then install the camshaft
sprocket onto the camshaft.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS24230
NOTE:
INSTALLING THE CYLINDER HEAD
1. Install:
● Cylinder head
● Cylinder head bolts (226 mm)
● Cylinder head bolts (45 mm)
● When
installing the camshaft sprocket, be sure
to keep the timing chain as tight as possible on
the exhaust side.
● Align the dowel pin with the slot of camshaft
sprocket.
● Assemble the camshaft sprocket by facing its
die stamp outward of the vehicle.
T.
R.
Cylinder head bolt (226 mm)
22 Nm (2.2 m•kg, 16 ft•lb)
Cylinder head bolt (45 mm)
20 Nm (2.0 m•kg, 15 ft•lb)
ECA13770
CAUTION:
Do not turn the crankshaft when installing
the camshaft sprockets to avoid damage or
improper valve.
NOTE:
● Apply
an engine oil to the seating face of cylinder head bolt (226-mm long), and apply a molybdenum disulfide oil to the bolt threads.
5-10
CYLINDER HEAD
d. While holding the camshafts, temporarily
tighten the camshaft sprocket bolts.
e. Remove the wire from the timing chain.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Tighten:
● Camshaft sprocket bolts
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
T.
3. Install:
● Timing chain tensioner
Camshaft sprocket bolt
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
R.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
ECA13750
a. Push down the timing chain tensioner rod
end by your finger, and fully wind up the
tensioner clockwise using a small flat-blade
screwdriver “1” .
CAUTION:
Be sure to tighten the camshaft sprocket
bolts to the specified torque to avoid the
possibility of the bolts coming loose and
damaging the engine.
NOTE:
The timing chain tensioner rod must be held by
the flat-blade screwdriver until the timing chain
tensioner bolt is tightened.
NOTE:
Secure the generator rotor bolts and tighten the
camshaft sprocket bolts using a wrench.
5. Turn:
● Crankshaft
(several turns counterclockwise)
6. Check:
● Mark “a”
Make sure that generator rotor mark “a”
aligns with generator rotor cover mark “b”.
● Mark “c”
Make sure that camshaft sprocket mark “c”
aligns with cylinder head mark “d”.
Not aligned → Reassemble.
See the following assembling procedure.
1
b. Assemble the timing chain tensioner and the
gasket in the cylinder.
T.
Timing chain tensioner bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
R.
c. Install the gasket and timing chain tensioner
cap bolt.
T.
Timing chain tensioner cap bolt
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
R.
5-11
CYLINDER HEAD
7. Measure:
● Bulb clearance
Out of specification → Adjust.
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE VALVE CLEARANCE” on page 3-5.
5-12
CAMSHAFT
EAS3C51006
CAMSHAFT
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND CAMSHAFT
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Job/Part
Q’ty
Cylinder head
Camshaft retainer
Camshaft
Intake rocker arm shaft
Rocker arm
Exhaust rocker arm shaft
Locknut
Valve clearance adjusting screws
Remarks
Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” on page 5-6.
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-13
CAMSHAFT
EAS23770
REMOVING THE ROCKER ARMS AND
CAMSHAFT
1. Loosen:
● Locknuts “1”
● Valve clearance adjusting screws “2”
2. Remove:
● Camshaft retainer “3”
EAS23840
CHECKING THE CAMSHAFT
1. Check:
● Camshaft lobes
Blue discoloration/pitting/scratches → Replace the camshaft.
2. Measure:
● Camshaft lobe dimensions “a” and “b”
Out of specification → Replace the camshaft.
3. Remove:
● Camshaft “1”
Camshaft lobe dimension limit
Intake A
36.520–36.620 mm
(1.4378–1.4417 in)
Limit
36.460 mm (1.4354 in)
Intake B
30.201–30.301 mm
(1.1890–1.1930 in)
Limit
30.151 mm (1.1870 in)
Exhaust A
36.564–36.664 mm
(1.4395–1.4435 in)
Limit
36.514 mm (1.4376 in)
Exhaust B
30.216–30.316 mm
(1.1896–1.1935 in)
Limit
30.166 mm (1.1876 in)
NOTE:
● Screw
10-mm bolt “2” into the threaded end of
the camshaft and then pull out the camshaft.
● Take care not to interfere and damage the
rocker arm.
4. Remove:
● Intake rocker arm shaft
● Exhaust rocker arm shaft
● Rocker arm (Intake and exhaust sides)
NOTE:
Remove the rocker arm using the weight “1” and
slide hammer bolt “2”.
Slide hammer bolt
90890-01083
Slide hammer bolt 6 mm
YU-01083-1
Weight
90890-01084
YU-01083-3
5-14
CAMSHAFT
Rocker arm shaft outside diameter
11.981–11.991 mm
(0.4717–0.4721 in)
Limit
11.950 mm (0.4705 in)
3. Check:
● Camshaft oil passage
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air.
EAS23880
CHECKING THE ROCKER ARMS AND
ROCKER ARM SHAFTS
The following procedure applies to all of the
rocker arms and rocker arm shafts.
1. Check:
● Rocker arm
Damage/wear → Replace.
2. Check:
● Rocker arm shaft
Blue discoloration/excessive wear/pitting/
scratches → Replace or check the lubrication
system.
3. Measure:
● Rocker arm inside diameter “a”
Out of specification → Replace.
5. Calculate:
● Rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft clearance
NOTE:
Calculate the clearance by subtracting the rocker arm shaft outside diameter from the rocker
arm inside diameter.
Out of specification → Replace the defective
part(s).
Rocker-arm-to-rocker-arm-shaft
clearance
0.009–0.037 mm (0.0004–0.0015
in)
Rocker arm inside diameter
12.000–12.018 mm
(0.4724–0.4731 in)
Limit
12.036 mm (0.4739 in)
EAS24040
INSTALLING THE CAMSHAFT AND
ROCKER ARMS
1. Lubricate:
● Rocker arm
● Rocker arm shafts
Recommended lubricant
Rocker arm
Molybdenum-disulfide oil
Rocker arm shaft
Engine oil
2. Install:
● Exhaust rocker arm “1”
● Exhaust rocker arm shaft “2”
4. Measure:
● Rocker arm shaft outside diameter “a”
Out of specification → Replace.
NOTE:
The exhaust rocker arm shaft must be inserted
into the cylinder head completely.
5-15
CAMSHAFT
NOTE:
Assemble the camshaft by inserting the 10-mm
bolt into the camshaft hole and tightening it.
3. Install:
● Intake rocker arm
● Intake rocker arm shaft
NOTE:
● Insert
cylinder head bolt “1” (226-mm long) into
the cylinder head bolt hole.
● Keep slot “a” of intake rocker arm shaft in horizontal direction, align slot “b” of the shaft end
with the cylinder head bolt hole, and assemble
the camshaft.
1
b
a
4. Lubricate:
● Camshaft
Recommended lubricant
Camshaft
Molybdenum-disulfide oil
Camshaft bearing
Engine oil
5. Install:
● Camshaft
5-16
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
EAS24270
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
Removing the valves and valve springs
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Cylinder head
Rocker arm/Camshaft
Valve cotter
Valve spring retainer
Outer valve spring
Inner valve spring
Intake valve
Exhaust valve
Valve stem seal
Valve spring seat
Valve guide
Remarks
Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” on page 5-6.
Refer to “CAMSHAFT” on page 5-13.
4
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-17
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
EAS24280
REMOVING THE VALVES
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves and related components.
NOTE:
Before removing the internal parts of the cylinder head (e.g., valves, valve springs, valve
seats), make sure the valves properly seal.
1. Check:
● Valve sealing
Leakage at the valve seat → Check the valve
face, valve seat, and valve seat width.
Refer to “CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS”
on page 5-20.
3. Remove:
● Valve spring retainer “1”
● Outer valve spring “2”
● Inner valve spring “3”
● Valve “4”
● Valve stem seal “5”
● Valve spring seat “6”
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Pour a clean solvent “a” into the intake and
exhaust ports.
b. Check that the valves properly seal.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Identify the position of each part very carefully
so that it can be reinstalled in its original place.
There should be no leakage at the valve seat
“1”.
EAS24290
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Remove:
● Valve cotters “1”
NOTE:
Remove the valve cotters by compressing the
valve spring with the valve spring compressor
“2”.
CHECKING THE VALVES AND VALVE
GUIDES
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves and valve guides.
1. Measure:
● Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance
Out of specification → Replace the valve
guide.
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance =
Valve guide inside diameter “a” Valve stem diameter “b”
Valve spring compressor
90890-04019
YM-04019
5-18
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance (intake)
0.010–0.037 mm (0.0004–0.0015
in)
Limit
0.080 mm (0.0032 in)
Valve-stem-to-valve-guide clearance (exhaust)
0.025–0.052 mm (0.0010–0.0020
in)
Limit
0.100 mm (0.0039 in)
b. Install the new valve guide with the valve
guide installer “2” and valve guide remover
“1”.
c. After installing the valve guide, bore the valve
guide with the valve guide reamer “3” to obtain the proper valve-stem-to-valve-guide
clearance.
2. Replace:
● Valve guide
NOTE:
To ease valve guide removal and installation,
and to maintain the correct fit, heat the cylinder
head to 100°C (212°F) in an oven.
NOTE:
After replacing the valve guide, reface the valve
seat.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the valve guide with the valve guide
remover “1”.
5-19
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
Valve stem runout
Valve stem runout
0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
Valve guide remover (ø6)
90890-04064
Valve guide remover (6.0 mm)
YM-04064-A
Valve guide installer (ø6)
90890-04065
Valve guide installer (6.0 mm)
YM-04065-A
Valve guide reamer (ø6)
90890-04066
Valve guide reamer (6.0 mm)
YM-04066
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS24300
3. Eliminate:
● Carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
4. Check:
● Valve face
Pitting/wear → Grind the valve face.
● Valve stem end
Mushroom shape or diameter larger than the
body of the valve stem → Replace the valve.
5. Measure:
● Valve margin thickness “a”
Out of specification → Replace the valve.
CHECKING THE VALVE SEATS
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves and valve seats.
1. Eliminate:
● Carbon deposits
(from the valve face and valve seat)
2. Check:
● Valve seat
Pitting/wear → Replace the cylinder head.
3. Measure:
● Valve seat width “a”
Out of specification → Replace the cylinder
head.
Valve margin thickness
Valve margin thickness D (intake)
0.80–1.20 mm (0.0315–0.0472 in)
Valve margin thickness D (exhaust)
0.80–1.20 mm (0.0315–0.0472 in)
Limit of valve seat width (IN)
1.7 mm
Limit of valve seat width (EX)
1.7 mm
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
6. Measure:
● Valve stem runout
Out of specification → Replace the valve.
a. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) “b”
onto the valve face.
NOTE:
● When
installing a new valve, always replace
the valve guide.
● If the valve is removed or replaced, always replace the oil seal.
5-20
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
seat are evenly polished, then clean off all of
the lapping compound.
NOTE:
For the best lapping results, lightly tap the valve
seat while turning the valve back and forth between your hands.
e. Apply a fine lapping compound to the valve
face and repeat the above steps.
f. After every lapping procedure, be sure to
clean off all of the lapping compound from the
valve face and valve seat.
g. Apply Mechanic’s blueing dye (Dykem) “b”
onto the valve face.
b. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
c. Press the valve through the valve guide and
onto the valve seat to make a clear impression.
d. Measure the valve seat width.
NOTE:
Where the valve seat and valve face contacted
one another, the blueing will have been removed.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Lap:
● Valve face
● Valve seat
NOTE:
After replacing the cylinder head or replacing the
valve and valve guide, the valve seat and valve
face should be lapped.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
h. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
i. Press the valve through the valve guide and
onto the valve seat to make a clear impression.
j. Measure the valve seat width “c” again. If the
valve seat width is out of specification, reface
and lap the valve seat.
a. Apply a coarse lapping compound “a” to the
valve face.
ECA13790
CAUTION:
Do not let the lapping compound enter the
gap between the valve stem and the valve
guide.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS24310
CHECKING THE VALVE SPRINGS
The following procedure applies to all of the
valve springs.
1. Measure:
● Valve spring free length “a”
Out of specification → Replace the valve
spring.
b. Apply molybdenum disulfide oil onto the
valve stem.
c. Install the valve into the cylinder head.
d. Turn the valve until the valve face and valve
5-21
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
Inner spring
Installed compression spring
force (intake)
75.00–91.70 N (16.86–20.61 lbf)
(7.65–9.35 kgf)
Installed length (intake)
30.50 mm (1.20 in)
Installed compression spring
force (exhaust)
75.00–91.70 N (16.86–20.61 lbf)
(7.65–9.35 kgf)
Installed length (exhaust)
30.50 mm (1.20 in)
Outer spring
Installed compression spring
force (intake)
128.50–157.90 N (28.89–35.50
lbf) (13.10–16.10 kgf)
Installed length (intake)
32.00 mm (1.26 in)
Installed compression spring
force (exhaust)
128.50–157.90 N (28.89–35.50
lbf) (13.10–16.10 kgf)
Installed length (exhaust)
32.00 mm (1.26 in)
Valve spring free length
Inner spring
Free length (intake)
36.17 mm (1.42 in)
Free length (exhaust)
36.17 mm (1.42 in)
Outer spring
Free length (intake)
36.63 mm (1.44 in)
Free length (exhaust)
36.63 mm (1.44 in)
2. Measure:
● Compressed valve spring force “1”
Out of specification → Replace the valve
spring.
3. Measure:
● Valve spring tilt “a”
Out of specification → Replace the valve
spring.
Spring tilt limit
Inner spring
Spring tilt (intake)
2.5 °/1.6 mm
Spring tilt (exhaust)
2.5 °/1.6 mm
Outer spring
Spring tilt (intake)
2.5 °/1.6 mm
Spring tilt (exhaust)
2.5 °/1.6 mm
a. Compressed valve spring force
b. Installed length
5-22
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
EAS24340
INSTALLING THE VALVES
The following procedure applies to all of the
valves and related components.
1. Deburr:
● Valve stem end
(with an oil stone)
2. Lubricate:
● Valve stem “1”
● Valve stem seal “2”
(with the recommended lubricant)
a. Larger pitch
b. Smaller pitch
Recommended lubricant
Molybdenum disulfide oil
4. Install:
● Valve cotters “1”
NOTE:
Install the valve cotters by compressing the
valve spring with the valve spring compressor
“2”.
Valve spring compressor
90890-04019
YM-04019
3. Install:
● Valve spring seat “1”
● Valve stem seal “2” New
● Valve “3”
● Inner valve spring “4”
● Outer valve spring “5”
● Valve spring retainer “6”
(on to the cylinder cylinder head)
NOTE:
● Make
sure each valve is installed in its original
place. Refer to the following embossed marks.
Intake valve: “5HO:”
Exhaust valve: “5BP”
● Install the valve springs with the larger pitch “a”
facing up.
5. To secure the valve cotters onto the valve
stem, lightly tap the valve tip with a soft-face
hammer.
ECA13800
CAUTION:
Hitting the valve tip with excessive force
could damage the valve.
5-23
VALVES AND VALVE SPRINGS
5-24
CYLINDER AND PISTON
EAS24350
CYLINDER AND PISTON
Removing the cylinder and piston
T.
R.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 15 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
New
4
E
8
1
9
10
12
11
New
T.
R.
17 Nm (1.7 m • kg, 12 ft • Ib)
2
3 New
2
E
New
7
New
5
New 5 6
E
E
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Cylinder head
Cylinder
Dowel pin
Cylinder gasket
Oil delivery pipe
Piston pin clip
Piston pin
Piston
Top ring
2nd ring
Upper oil ring rail
Lower oil ring rail
Oil ring expander
Remarks
Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” on page 5-6.
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-25
CYLINDER AND PISTON
Vertical scratches → Rebore or replace the
cylinder, and replace the piston and piston
rings as a set.
2. Measure:
● Piston-to-cylinder clearance
EAS24380
REMOVING THE PISTON
1. Remove:
● Piston pin clips “1”
● Piston pin “2”
● Piston “3”
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
ECA13810
a. Measure cylinder bore “C” with the cylinder
bore gauge.
CAUTION:
Do not use a hammer to drive the piston pin
out.
NOTE:
Measure cylinder bore “C” by taking side-to-side
and front-to-back measurements of the cylinder.
Then, find the average of the measurements.
NOTE:
● Before
removing the piston pin clip, cover the
crankcase opening with a clean rag to prevent
the piston pin clip from falling into the crankcase.
● Before removing the piston pin, deburr the piston pin clip’s groove and the piston’s pin bore
area.
Bore
74.000–74.0µ16 mm
(2.9134–2.9140 in)
Wear limit
74.100 mm (2.9173 in)
Taper limit
0.050 mm (0.0020 in)
Out of round limit
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
2. Remove:
● Top ring
● 2nd ring
● Oil ring
NOTE:
“C” = maximum of D1–D2
When removing a piston ring, open the end gap
with your fingers and lift the other side of the ring
over the piston crown.
“T” = maximum of D1 or D2 - maximum of D5 or
D6
“R” = maximum of D1, D3 or D5 - maximum of
D2, D4 or D6
b. If out of specification, rebore or replace the
cylinder, and replace the piston and piston
rings as a set.
c. Measure piston skirt diameter D “a” with the
micrometer.
EAS24390
CHECKING THE CYLINDER AND PISTON
1. Check:
● Piston wall
● Cylinder wall
5-26
CYLINDER AND PISTON
Piston ring side clearance
Top ring
Ring side clearance
0.030–0.065 mm (0.0012–0.0026
in)
Limit
0.115 mm (0.0045 in)
2nd ring
Ring side clearance
0.020–0.055 mm (0.0008–0.0022
in)
Limit
0.115 mm (0.0045 in)
a. Piston skirt diameter
b. 11 mm (0.43 in) from the bottom edge of the piston
Diameter D
73.983–73.998 mm
(2.9127–2.9133 in)
d. If out of specification, replace the piston and
piston rings as a set.
e. Calculate the piston-to-cylinder clearance
with the following formula.
Piston-to-cylinder clearance =
Cylinder bore “C” Piston skirt diameter “D”
2. Install:
● Piston ring
(into the cylinder)
NOTE:
Piston-to-cylinder clearance
0.010–0.025 mm (0.0004–0.0010
in)
Limit
0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
Level the piston ring into the cylinder with the
piston crown.
f. If out of specification, rebore or replace the
cylinder, and replace the piston and piston
rings as a set.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS24430
CHECKING THE PISTON RINGS
1. Measure:
● Piston ring side clearance
Out of specification → Replace the piston
and piston rings as a set.
a. 40 mm (1.57 in)
3. Measure:
● Piston ring end gap
Out of specification → Replace the piston
ring.
NOTE:
Before measuring the piston ring side clearance,
eliminate any carbon deposits from the piston
ring grooves and piston rings.
NOTE:
The oil ring expander spacer’s end gap cannot
be measured. If the oil ring rail’s gap is excessive, replace all three piston rings.
5-27
CYLINDER AND PISTON
Piston ring end gap
Top ring
End gap (installed)
0.19–0.31 mm (0.0075–0.0122 in)
Limit
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
2nd ring
End gap (installed)
0.30–0.45 mm (0.0118–0.0177 in)
Limit
0.60 mm (0.0236 in)
Oil ring
End gap (installed)
0.10–0.35 mm (0.0039–0.0138 in)
4. Calculate:
● Piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance
Out of specification → Replace the piston pin
and piston as a set.
EAS24440
CHECKING THE PISTON PIN
1. Check:
● Piston pin
Blue discoloration/grooves → Replace the
piston pin and then check the lubrication system.
2. Measure:
● Piston pin outside diameter “a”
Out of specification → Replace the piston pin.
Piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore clearance
=
Piston pin bore diameter “b” Piston pin outside diameter “a”
Piston-pin-to-piston-pin-bore
clearance
0.002–0.022 mm (0.0001–0.0009
in)
Piston pin outside diameter
15.991–16.000 mm
(0.6296–0.6299 in)
Limit
15.971 mm (0.6288 in)
EAS24450
INSTALLING THE PISTON AND CYLINDER
1. Install:
● Top ring “1”
● 2nd ring “2”
● Lower oil ring rail “3”
● Upper oil ring rail “4”
● Oil ring expander “5”
NOTE:
Be sure to install the top ring and 2nd ring so that
the manufacturer’s marks or numbers face up.
3. Measure:
● Piston pin bore diameter “b”
Out of specification → Replace the piston.
Piston pin bore inside diameter
16.002–16.013 mm
(0.6300–0.6304 in)
Limit
16.043 mm (0.6316 in)
2. Install:
● Piston “1”
● Piston pin “2”
● Piston pin clips “3” New
NOTE:
● Apply
5-28
engine oil to the piston pin.
CYLINDER AND PISTON
● Make
sure the arrow mark “a” on the piston
points towards the exhaust side of the cylinder.
● Before installing the piston pin clip, cover the
crankcase opening with a clean rag to prevent
the clip from falling into the crankcase.
(exhaust side) through the timing chain cavity.
3. Lubricate:
● Piston
● Piston rings
● Cylinder
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
4. Offset:
● Piston ring end gaps
a. Top ring
b. Upper oil ring rail
c. Oil ring expander
d. Lower oil ring rail
e. 2nd ring
f. 20 mm (0.79 in)
5. Install:
● Cylinder
T.
Cylinder bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
R.
NOTE:
● While
compressing the piston rings with one
hand, install the cylinder with the other hand.
● Pass the timing chain and timing chain guide
5-29
CLUTCH
EAS25061
CLUTCH
Removing the clutch cover
New 1
T.
R.
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 15 ft • Ib)
2
New
New
8
9
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
5
New
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
8
7 New
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
6
4
New
3
T.
R.
T.
R.
Order
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
Refer to “CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL” on
page 3-11.
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” on page 5-1.
Drain the engine oil
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Remarks
Exhaust pipe
Cotter pin
Brake pedal
Oil filter element cover
Oil filter element
Oil delivery pipe
Clutch cover
Clutch cover gasket
Dowel pin
Gasket
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-30
CLUTCH
Removing the clutch
T.
R.
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
14
3
4
2
7
8
12
1
(5)
16
13 New
6
17
18
15
5
11
9
19
10 New
T.
R.
75 Nm (7.5 m • kg, 54 ft • Ib)
E
T.
R.
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Clutch spring
Pressure plate
Adjusting screw
Push plate
Friction plate
Clutch plate
Clutch damper spring
Clutch damper spring seat
Primary drive gear nut
Lock washer
Claw washer
Clutch boss nut
Lock washer
Clutch boss
Thrust washer
Clutch housing
Ball
Clutch push rod
Primary drive gear
80 Nm (8.0 m • kg, 58 ft • Ib)
Remarks
5
1
1
1
6
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-31
CLUTCH
Removing the push lever shaft
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
3
2
1
4
E
New
7
6
5
New
E
T.
R.
Order
Job/Parts to remove
12 Nm (1.2 m • kg, 8.7 ft • Ib)
Q’ty
Air cut-off valve
Generator rotor cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Remarks
Refer to “AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM” on
page 6-9.
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH” on page 5-45.
Clutch cable
Ignition coil
Push lever shaft
Push lever spring
Circlip
Oil seal
Bearing
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-32
CLUTCH
EAS25070
NOTE:
REMOVING THE CLUTCH
1. Straighten the lock washer tab.
2. Loosen:
● Primary drive gear nut “1”
Measure the friction plate at four places.
Friction plate thickness
2.70–2.90 mm (0.106–0.114 in)
Wear limit
2.60 mm (0.1024 in)
NOTE:
Insert aluminum plate “a” between primary drive
gear “2” and primary driven gear “3”, and loosen
the primary drive gear nut.
EAS25110
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PLATES
The following procedure applies to all of the
clutch plates.
1. Check:
● Clutch plate
Damage → Replace the clutch plates as a
set.
2. Measure:
● Clutch plate warpage
(with a surface plate and thickness gauge “1”)
Out of specification → Replace the clutch
plates as a set.
3. Loosen:
● Clutch boss nut “1”
NOTE:
While holding the clutch boss “3” with the universal clutch holder “2”, loosen the clutch boss nut.
Universal clutch holder
90890-04086
YM-91042
1
3
Warpage limit
0.20 mm (0.0079 in)
2
EAS25100
CHECKING THE FRICTION PLATES
The following procedure applies to all of the friction plates.
1. Check:
● Friction plate
Damage/wear → Replace the friction plates
as a set.
2. Measure:
● Friction plate thickness
Out of specification → Replace the friction
plates as a set.
EAS25140
CHECKING THE CLUTCH SPRINGS
The following procedure applies to all of the
clutch springs.
1. Check:
● Clutch spring
Damage → Replace the clutch springs as a
set.
2. Measure:
5-33
CLUTCH
●
Clutch spring free length “a”
Out of specification → Replace the clutch
springs as a set.
Clutch spring free length
40.10 mm (1.58 in)
Limit
38.10 mm (1.50 in)
EAS25170
CHECKING THE PRESSURE PLATE
1. Check:
● Pressure plate
Cracks/damage → Replace.
EAS25190
CHECKING THE CLUTCH PUSH RODS
1. Check:
● Clutch push rod
● Adjusting screw
● Ball
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace the defective part(s).
2. Measure:
● Push rod bending limit
Out of specification → Replace.
EAS25150
CHECKING THE CLUTCH HOUSING
1. Check:
● Clutch housing dogs
Damage/pitting/wear → Deburr the clutch
housing dogs or replace the clutch housing.
NOTE:
Pitting on the clutch housing dogs will cause erratic clutch operation.
Push rod bending limit
0.500 mm (0.0197 in)
EAS25200
CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR
1. Check:
● Primary drive gear
Damage/wear → Replace the primary drive
and primary driven gears as a set.
Excessive noise during operation → Replace
the primary drive and primary driven gears as
a set.
EAS25160
CHECKING THE CLUTCH BOSS
1. Check:
● Clutch boss splines
Damage/pitting/wear → Replace the clutch
boss.
EAS25210
CHECKING THE PRIMARY DRIVEN GEAR
1. Check:
● Primary driven gear
Damage/wear → Replace the primary drive
and primary driven gears as a set.
Excessive noise during operation → Replace
the primary drive and primary driven gears as
a set.
NOTE:
Pitting on the clutch boss splines will cause erratic clutch operation.
EAS25260
INSTALLING THE CLUTCH
1. Install:
● Primary drive gear “1”
5-34
CLUTCH
Clutch housing “2”
Thrust washer
● Clutch boss “3”
● Lock washer “4” New
● Claw washer “5”
● Lock washer “6” New
●
1
3
●
2
NOTE:
● Assemble
the primary drive gear by facing its
flat face “a” toward the crankcase.
● Align lock washer projection “b” with the clutch
boss slit during assembling.
● Align lock washer projection “c” with the claw
washer slit during assembling.
1
Primary drive gear nut
80 Nm (8.0 m•kg, 58 ft•lb)
R.
5
T.
New 6
4. Tighten:
● Primary drive gear nut “1”
a
NOTE:
Insert aluminum plate “a” between primary drive
gear “2” and primary driven gear “3”, and tighten
the primary drive gear nut.
3
2
b
1
5
6
New
c
4
New
5. Be sure to bend the lock washer tab along to
the nut side face.
6. Lubricate:
● Friction plates
● Clutch plates
(with the recommended lubricant)
2. Install:
● Clutch boss nut
● Primary drive gear nut
3. Tighten:
● Clutch boss nut “1”
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
T.
Clutch boss nut
75 Nm (7.5 m•kg, 54 ft•lb)
R.
7. Install:
● Clutch damper spring seat “1”
● Clutch damper spring “2”
● Friction plates
● Clutch plates
NOTE:
While holding the clutch boss “3” with the universal clutch holder “2”, tighten the clutch boss nut.
NOTE:
● Assemble
the clutch dumper spring seat and
the clutch damper spring as shown.
● First, install the friction plate and then alternate
between the clutch plates and friction plates.
Universal clutch holder
90890-04086
YM-91042
5-35
CLUTCH
10.Adjust:
● Push lever position
1
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
2
a. Loosen the locknut “1”.
b. Turn the adjusting screw “2” in or out until the
marks are aligned.
c. Hold the adjusting screw to prevent it from
moving and then tighten the locknut to specification.
ECA13820
CAUTION:
8. Install:
● Pressure plate
● Adjusting screw
● Pressure plate
● Clutch springs
Do not overtighten the locknut since this will
remove the free play between both push
rods.
NOTE:
T.
Tighten the clutch spring bolts in two stages and
in a crisscross pattern.
Locknut
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
R.
T.
R.
Adjusting screw lock nut
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
Clutch spring bolt
8 Nm (0.8 m•kg, 5.8 ft•lb)
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
11.Install:
● Clutch cover “1”
T.
R.
9. Check:
● Push lever position
Push lever mark “a” and crankcase mark “b”
not aligned → Correct.
Clutch cover bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
NOTE:
Tighten the bolts diagonally.
M6 × 25 mm bolt “2”
● M6 × 35 mm bolt “3”
● M6 × 50 mm bolt “4”
● M6 × 50 mm bolt (with gasket)“5”
● M6 × 55 mm bolt (with gasket)“6”
NOTE:
●
Move the push lever in the arrow direction with
your fingers, and check that it feels heavier
when its mark aligns.
b
a
5-36
CLUTCH
5
4
4
6
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
3
2
2
12.Adjust:
● Clutch cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE CLUTCH CABLE FREE PLAY” on page 3-12.
5-37
OIL PUMP AND BALANCER GEAR
EAS3C51007
OIL PUMP AND BALANCER GEAR
Removing oil pump and balancer gear
14
15
LT
New 13
8
T.
R.
6 Nm (0.6 m • kg, 4.3 ft • Ib)
12
11
T.
R.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
5
4
7
6
3
New 10
Order
9
55 Nm (5.5 m • kg, 40 ft • Ib)
1
Job/Part
2 New
Q’ty
Primary drive gear
Balancer driven gear nut
Lock washer
Buffer boss
Balancer driven gear
Absorber plate
Spring
Dowel pin
Straight key
Spacer
Circlip
Oil pump driven gear
Oil pump assembly
Oil pump gasket
Balancer drive gear
Oil strainer
E
Remarks
Refer to “CLUTCH” on page 5-30.
1
1
1
1
1
6
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-38
OIL PUMP AND BALANCER GEAR
Disassembling the oil pump
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Job/Part
Q’ty
Oil pump cover
Dowel pin
Oil pump shaft
Dowel pin
Inner rotor
Outer rotor
Oil pump housing
Remarks
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5-39
OIL PUMP AND BALANCER GEAR
EAS3C51008
Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip
clearance
0.150 mm (0.0059 in)
Limit
0.200 mm (0.0079 in)
Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing
clearance
0.100–0.151 mm (0.0039–0.0059
in)
Limit
0.221 mm (0.0087 in)
Oil-pump-housing-to-inner-and-outer-rotor clearance
0.04–0.09 mm (0.0016–0.0035 in)
Limit
0.16 mm (0.0063 in)
REMOVING THE BALANCER GEAR
1. Straighten the lock washer tab.
2. Loosen:
● Balancer driven gear unit “1”
NOTE:
Insert aluminum plate “a” between balancer
drive gear “2” and balancer driven gear “3”, and
loosen the balancer driven gear nut.
3. Remove:
● Balancer drive gear
Refer to “CLUTCH” on page 5-30.
EAS24960
CHECKING THE OIL PUMP
1. Check:
● Oil pump driven gear
● Oil pump housing
● Oil pump housing cover
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace the defective part(s).
2. Measure:
● Inner-rotor-to-outer-rotor-tip clearance “a”
● Outer-rotor-to-oil-pump-housing
clearance
“b”
● Oil-pump-housing-to-inner-rotor-and-outer-rotor clearance “c”
Out of specification → Replace the oil pump.
1. Inner rotor
2. Outer rotor
3. Oil pump housing
3. Check:
● Oil pump operation
Rough movement → Repeat steps (1) and
(2) or replace the defective part(s).
EAS24990
CHECKING THE OIL STRAINER
1. Check:
● Oil strainer
Damage → Replace.
Contaminants → Clean with solvent.
5-40
OIL PUMP AND BALANCER GEAR
arrow direction as shown.
EAS25000
ASSEMBLING THE OIL PUMP
1. Lubricate:
● Inner rotor
● Outer rotor
● Oil pump shaft
(with the recommended lubricant)
Recommended lubricant
Engine oil
2. Install:
● Oil pump housing “1”
● Dowel pin
● Outer rotor “2”
● Inner rotor “3”
2. Install:
● Balancer drive gear
NOTE:
Direct the balancer drive gear mark outward of
the vehicle during assembling.
NOTE:
Align outer rotor mark “a” with inner rotor mark
“b” and assemble them in the oil pump housing.
3. Install:
● Oil pump gasket New
● Oil pump
b
a
T.
1
Oil pump bolt
26 Nm (2.6 m•kg, 19 ft•lb)
R.
ECA13890
3
CAUTION:
2
3. Install:
● Oil pump cover
● Oil pump shaft
● Dowel pin
After tightening the bolts, make sure the oil
pump turns smoothly.
4. Install:
● Oil pump driven gear “1”
NOTE:
Direct stamp “a” of the oil pump driven gear outward of the vehicle.
T.
Oil pump cover screw
7 Nm (0.7 m•kg, 5.1 ft•lb)
a
R.
NOTE:
1
When installing the oil pump cover, align the
dowel pin of oil pump shaft with the inner rotor
slot.
4. Check:
● Oil pump operation
Refer to “CHECKING THE OIL PUMP” on
page 5-40.
INSTALL THE OIL PUMP AND BALANCER
GEAR
1. Install:
● Oil strainer
5. Install:
● Balancer driven gear “1”
● Buffer boss “2”
● Dowel pin “3”
● Spring “4”
(To driven gear)
NOTE:
NOTE:
Assemble the oil strainer in the crankcase in the
● Align
EAS3C51009
mark “a” of the balancer driven gear with
slot “b” of the buffer boss.
5-41
OIL PUMP AND BALANCER GEAR
● Assemble
the dowel pin on the spring as
shown.
a
b
2
3
4
1
9. Be sure to bend the lock washer tab along to
the nut side face.
6. Install:
● Balancer driven gear “1”
● Lock washer New
● Balancer driven gear nut
NOTE:
Align mark “a” of the balancer drive gear with
mark “b” of the balancer driven gear.
7. Tighten:
● Primary drive gear nut
Refer to “CLUTCH” on page 5-30.
8. Tighten:
● Balancer driven gear nut “1”
T.
Balancer driven gear nut
55 Nm (5.5 m•kg, 40 ft•lb)
R.
NOTE:
Insert aluminum plate “a” between balancer
drive gear “2” and balancer driven gear “3”, and
tighten the balancer driven gear nut.
5-42
SHIFT SHAFT
EAS25410
SHIFT SHAFT
Removing the shift shaft and stopper lever
1
E
3
2
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
LT
Order
1
2
3
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Shift pedal assembly
Clutch housing
Shift shaft assembly
Stopper lever
Stopper lever spring
Remarks
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” on page 5-1.
Refer to “CLUTCH” on page 5-30.
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-43
SHIFT SHAFT
EAS25420
CHECKING THE SHIFT SHAFT
1. Check:
● Shift shaft
● Shift lever
Bends/damage/wear → Replace.
● Shift lever spring
Damage/wear → Replace.
3
2
1
EAS25430
CHECKING THE STOPPER LEVER
1. Check:
● Stopper lever
Bends/damage → Replace.
Roller turns roughly → Replace the stopper
lever.
EAS25450
INSTALLING THE SHIFT SHAFT
1. Install:
● Stopper lever “1”
● Stopper lever spring
T.
R.
Stopper lever bolt
10 Nm (1.0 kg•m)
Apply locking agent
TITE®)
(LOC-
NOTE:
● Hook
the ends of the stopper lever spring onto
the stopper lever and the crankcase boss.
● Mesh the stopper lever with the shift drum segment assembly.
1
2. Install:
● Shift shaft assembly “1”
NOTE:
Align shaft spring “2” with stopper “3” and assemble the shift shaft assembly.
5-44
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
EAS3C51010
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
Removing the generator rotor and starter clutch
1
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
12
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
R.
E
LT
LT
10
E
3
T.
R.
6 New
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
9 (3)
4
LT
5
8
(5)
7
14
New
E
(3)
13 (3)
LT
15
(3)
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
11
T.
R.
R.
R.
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Drain the engine oil
Rear left side cover
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Drive sprocket cover
Shift pedal assembly
Pickup coil coupler/stator assembly coupler
Starter clutch Idle gear cover
Starter clutch idle gear1
Starter clutch idle gear shaft1
Generator rotor cover
Generator rotor cover gasket
Dowel pin
Stator assembly
Starter clutch idle gear2
Starter clutch idle gear shaft2
Generator rotor
Woodruff key
Starter clutch gear
5-45
1/1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
New
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
T.
Order
New
2 New
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
Remarks
Refer to “CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL” on
page 3-11.
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page
4-1.
Refer to “CHAIN DRIVE” on page 4-57.
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” on page 5-1.
Disconnect.
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
Removing the generator rotor and starter clutch
1
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
12
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
R.
E
LT
LT
10
E
3
T.
R.
6 New
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
9 (3)
4
LT
5
8
(5)
7
14
New
E
(3)
13 (3)
LT
15
(3)
T.
R.
30 Nm (3.0 m • kg, 22 ft • Ib)
11
T.
R.
R.
R.
14
15
60 Nm (6.0 m • kg, 43 ft • Ib)
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Bearing
Starter clutch
New
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
T.
Order
New
2 New
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
Remarks
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-46
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
EAS24490
REMOVING THE GENERATOR
1. Remove:
● Generator rotor bolt “1”
● Washer
1
2
NOTE:
● While
holding the generator rotor “2” with the
sheave holder “3”, loosen the generator rotor
bolt.
● Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the
projection on the generator rotor.
EAS24560
REMOVING THE STARTER CLUTCH
1. Remove:
● Starter clutch bolt “1”
Sheave holder
90890-01701
Primary clutch holder
YS-01880-A
NOTE:
● While
holding the generator rotor “3” with the
sheave holder “2”, remove the starter clutch
bolt.
● Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the
projection on the generator rotor.
3
1
Sheave holder
90890-01701
Primary clutch holder
YS-01880-A
2
2. Remove:
● Generator rotor “1”
(with the flywheel puller “2” )
● Woodruff key
1
3
1
ECA13880
CAUTION:
To protect the end of the crankshaft, place
an appropriate sized socket between the flywheel puller set center bolt and the crankshaft.
2
EAS24570
NOTE:
CHECKING THE STARTER CLUTCH
1. Check:
● Starter clutch rollers
Damage/wear → Replace.
2. Check:
● Starter clutch idle gear 1, 2
● Starter clutch gear
Burrs/chips/roughness/wear → Replace the
defective part(s).
3. Check:
● Starter clutch gear’s contacting surfaces
Damage/pitting/wear → Replace the starter
clutch gear.
4. Check:
● Starter clutch operation
Make sure the flywheel puller is centered over
the generator rotor.
Flywheel puller
90890-01362
Heavy duty puller
YU-33270-B
5-47
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Install the starter clutch gear “1” onto the
starter clutch and hold the starter clutch.
b. When turning the starter clutch gear clockwise “A”, the starter clutch and the starter
clutch gear should engage, otherwise the
starter clutch is faulty and must be replaced.
c. When turning the starter clutch drive gear
counterclockwise “B”, it should turn freely,
otherwise the starter clutch is faulty and must
be replaced.
A
EAS24500
INSTALLING THE GENERATOR
1. Install:
● Woodruff key
● Generator rotor
● Washer
● Generator rotor bolt
1
B
NOTE:
● Clean
the tapered portion of the crankshaft
and the generator rotor hub.
● When installing the generator rotor, make sure
the woodruff key is properly sealed in the keyway of the crankshaft.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Tighten:
● Generator rotor bolt “1”
EAS24600
R.
T.
R.
Starter clutch bolt
30 Nm (3.0 m•kg, 22 ft•lb)
Apply locking agent (LOCTITE®)
Generator rotor bolt
60 Nm (6.0 m•kg, 43 ft•lb)
T.
INSTALLING THE STARTER CLUTCH
1. Install:
● Starter clutch
NOTE:
● While
holding the generator rotor “2” with the
sheave holder “3”, tighten the generator rotor
bolt.
● Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the
projection on the generator rotor.
NOTE:
● While
holding the generator rotor “2” with the
sheave holder “1”, tighten the starter clutch
bolt.
● Do not allow the sheave holder to touch the
projection on the generator rotor.
Sheave holder
90890-01701
Primary clutch holder
YS-01880-A
Sheave holder
90890-01701
Primary clutch holder
YS-01880-A
3
1
2
3. Install:
● Generator rotor cover “1”
5-48
GENERATOR AND STARTER CLUTCH
T.
Generator rotor cover bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
R.
NOTE:
Tighten the bolts diagonally.
M6 × 30 mm bolt “2”
● M6 × 40 mm bolt “3”
● M6 × 45 mm bolt “4”
●
5-49
ELECTRIC STARTER
EAS24780
ELECTRIC STARTER
Removing the starter motor
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
1
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
2
3
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
Order
1
2
3
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Carburetor
Exhaust pipe
Clutch cable holder
Starter motor lead
Starter motor
Remarks
Refer to “CARBURETOR” on page 6-3.
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” on page 5-1.
1
1
1
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-50
ELECTRIC STARTER
Disassembling the starter motor
6
7
New
5
6
4
7
3
New
2
New
1
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Job/Parts to remove
New
Q’ty
Starter motor front cover
Lock washer
Armature assembly
Starter motor yoke
Starter motor rear cover
Brush
Brush spring
Remarks
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5-51
ELECTRIC STARTER
with the pocket tester.
EAS24790
CHECKING THE STARTER MOTOR
1. Check:
● Commutator
Dirt → Clean with 600 grit sandpaper.
2. Measure:
● Commutator diameter “a”
Out of specification → Replace the starter
motor.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
Armature coil
Commutator resistance “1”
0.0126–0.0154 Ω at 20°C (68°F)
Insulation resistance “2”
Above 1 MΩ at 20°C (68°F)
Limit
21.0 mm (0.83 in)
b. If any resistance is out of specification, replace the starter motor.
3. Measure:
● Mica undercut “a”
Out of specification → Scrape the mica to the
proper measurement with a hacksaw blade
that has been grounded to fit the commutator.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5. Measure:
● Brush length “a”
Out of specification → Replace the brushes
as a set.
Mica undercut (depth)
1.50 mm (0.06 in)
Limit
3.50 mm (0.14 in)
NOTE:
The mica of the commutator must be undercut to
ensure proper operation of the commutator.
6. Measure:
● Brush spring force
Out of specification → Replace the brush
springs as a set.
4. Measure:
● Armature assembly resistances (commutator
and insulation)
Out of specification → Replace the starter
motor.
Brush spring force
5.52–8.28 N (19.87–29.80 oz)
(563–844 gf)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Measure the armature assembly resistances
7. Check:
5-52
ELECTRIC STARTER
Gear teeth
Damage/wear → Replace the gear.
8. Check:
● Bearing
● Oil seal
Damage/wear → Replace the defective
part(s).
●
EAS24800
ASSEMBLING THE STARTER MOTOR
1. Install:
● Lock washer “1”
NOTE:
Align the tab “a” on the brush seat with the slot
“b” in the starter motor rear cover.
b
a
1
2. Install:
● Starter motor yoke “1”
● Starter motor front cover “2”
● Starter motor rear cover “3”
NOTE:
Align the match marks on the starter motor yoke
with the match marks on the front and starter
motor rear covers.
2
1
3
5-53
CRANKCASE
EAS25540
CRANKCASE
Separating the crankcase
New
6
New
T.
R.
T.
R.
8 Nm (0.8 m • kg, 5.8 ft • Ib)
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
5
1
LT
8
2
LT
3
9
10
4
New
9
7
New
T.
R.
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
Order
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Engine
Remarks
Refer to “ENGINE REMOVAL” on page 5-1.
Refer to “CYLINDER AND PISTON” on
page 5-25.
Refer to “OIL PUMP AND BALANCER
GEAR” on page 5-38.
Refer to “SHIFT SHAFT” on page 5-43.
Refer to “GENERATOR AND STARTER
CLUTCH” on page 5-45.
Piston
Balancer drive gear
Shift shaft
Generator rotor
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
20 Nm (2.0 m • kg, 15 ft • Ib)
Timing chain guide (intake side)
Timing chain
Crankshaft sprocket
Straight key
Speed sensor
Speed sensor rotor
Neutral switch
Right crankcase
Dowel pin
Left crankcase
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-54
CRANKCASE
Removing the Bearing
3
3
E
T.
R.
LT
LT
1
3
10 Nm (1.0 m • kg, 7.2 ft • Ib)
E
3
3
3
E
2 New
3
E
E
2 New
Order
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Refer to “CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY” on
page 5-58.
Refer to “TRANSMISSION” on page 5-61.
Crankshaft assembly
1
2
3
Remarks
Main axle assembly/Drive axle assembly
Bearing retainer
Oil seal
Bearing
1
2
7
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-55
CRANKCASE
Crack/stiffness → Replace the camshaft
sprocket, timing chain, and crankshaft
sprocket as a set.
2. Check:
● Crankshaft sprocket
Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” on page 5-6.
3. Check:
● Timing chain guide (intake side)
Damage/wear → Replace.
EAS25570
DISASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE
1. Remove:
● Crankcase bolts
NOTE:
Loosen each bolt 1/4 of a turn at a time, in two
stages and in a crisscross pattern. After all of the
bolts are fully loosened, remove them.
2. Turn:
● Shift drum segment
EAS3C51012
NOTE:
CHECKING THE BEARING AND OIL SEAL
1. Check:
● Bearing
Abnormal sound/rough movement/looseness → Replace.
2. Check:
● Oil seal
Damage/wear → Replace.
Turn the shift drum segment to the position
shown in the illustration. In this position, the shift
drum segment’s teeth will not contact the crankcase during crankcase separation.
EAS25700
ASSEMBLING THE CRANKCASE
1. Thoroughly clean all the gasket mating surfaces and crankcase mating surfaces.
2. Apply:
● Sealant
(onto the crankcase mating surfaces)
3. Remove:
● Right crankcase
Yamaha bond No. 1215 (Three
Bond No.1215®)
90890-85505
EC3C51004
CAUTION:
● Tap
on one side the crankcase with a
soft-face hammer. Tap only reinforced portions of the crankcase.
● Do not damage the crankcase mating surfaces.
● Remove the crankcase right halves first.
NOTE:
Do not allow any sealant to come into contact
with the oil gallery.
EAS25580
CHECKING THE CRANKCASE
1. Thoroughly wash the crankcase halves in a
mild solvent.
2. Thoroughly clean all the gasket surfaces and
crankcase mating surfaces.
3. Check:
● Crankcase
Cracks/damage → Replace.
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air.
3. Install:
● Right crankcase
(to the left crankcase)
EAS3C51011
T.
Crankcase bolt
10 Nm (1.0 m•kg, 7.2 ft•lb)
R.
CHECKING THE TIMING CHAIN,
CRANKSHAFT SPROCKET, TIMING CHAIN
GUIDE (INTAKE SIDE)
1. Check:
● Timing chain
NOTE:
● Turn
the shift drum segment as shown so that
the shift drum segment teeth do not contact the
5-56
CRANKCASE
crankcase during its assembling.
the bolts diagonally in two (2) stages,
with 1/4 turn each.
● Tighten
M6 × 70 mm bolt (with gasket)“1”
● M6 × 60 mm bolt “2”
● M6 × 55 mm bolt “3”
● M6 × 45 mm bolt “4”
●
4. Install:
● Crankshaft sprocket “1”
NOTE:
Assemble the crankshaft sprocket by facing its
chamfered side “a” toward the crankcase.
a
1
5-57
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
EAS3C51013
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
Crankshaft assembly and balancer
3
2
4
E
5
1
Order
1
2
3
4
5
Job/Part
Q’ty
Separate the crank case.
Balancer
Crankshaft assembly
Dowel pin
Plunger pin
Bearing
Remarks
Refer to “CRANKCASE” on page 5-54.
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-58
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
EAS26000
Runout limit C
0.030 mm (0.0012 in)
REMOVING THE CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
1. Remove:
● Crankshaft assembly “1”
NOTE:
Remove the crankshaft assembly using crankshaft separating tool “2”.
Crankcase separating tool
90890-01135
Crankcase separator
YU-01135-B
2. Measure:
● Big end side clearance
Out of specification → Replace the crankshaft assembly.
Big end side clearance D
0.350–0.850 mm (0.0138–0.0335
in)
3. Measure:
● Crankshaft width
Out of specification → Replace the crankshaft assembly.
2. Remove:
● Dowel pin “1”
● Plunger pin “2”
● Spring “3”
NOTE:
Width A
69.25–69.30 mm (2.726–2.728 in)
Slightly press the plunger pin and pull out the
dowel pin. Then, remove the plunger pin and the
spring.
4. Check:
● Bearing
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace the crankshaft assembly.
5. Check:
● Crankshaft journal oil passage
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air.
EAS26210
INSTALLING THE CRANKSHAFT
ASSEMBLY
1. Install:
● Spring “1”
● Plunger pin “2”
● Dowel pin “3”
EAS3C51014
CHECKING THE CRANKSHAFT AND
CONNECTING ROD
1. Measure:
● Crankshaft runout
Out of specification → Replace the crankshaft assembly, bearing or both.
NOTE:
Press the plunger pin by your fingers, and make
sure that it operates smoothly.
NOTE:
Turn the crankshaft slowly.
5-59
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY
2. Install:
● Crankshaft assembly “1”
NOTE:
Install the crankshaft assembly using spacer “2”,
adapter (M10) “3”, crankshaft installer “4”, and
crankshaft installer bolt “5”.
Crankshaft installer pot
90890-01274
Installing pot
YU-90058
Crankshaft installer bolt
90890-01275
Bolt
YU-90060
Adapter (M10)
90890-01383
Adapter #2
YU-90062
Spacer
90890-01288
ECA13970
CAUTION:
To avoid scratching the crankshaft and to
ease the installation procedure, lubricate the
oil seal lips with lithium-soap-based grease
and each bearing with engine oil.
NOTE:
Hold the connecting rod at top dead center
(TDC) with one hand while turning the nut of the
crankshaft installer bolt with the other. Turn the
crankshaft installer bolt until the crankshaft assembly bottoms against the bearing.
5-60
TRANSMISSION
EAS26241
TRANSMISSION
Removing the transmission, shift drum assembly, and shift forks
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Crankcase separation
Shift fork guide bar
Shift drum assembly
Shift fork-R
Shift fork-C
Shift fork-L
Main axle assembly
Drive axle assembly
Remarks
Refer to “CRANKCASE” on page 5-54.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
5-61
TRANSMISSION
Disassembling the transmission
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
2nd pinion gear
5th pinion gear
3rd/4th pinion gear
Main axle/1st pinion gear
Circlip
1st wheel gear
Dog clutch
Circlip
Lock washer
3rd wheel gear
4th wheel gear
5th wheel gear
Circlip
Lock washer
2nd wheel gear
Drive axle
Remarks
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
5-62
TRANSMISSION
EAS26260
CHECKING THE SHIFT FORKS
The following procedure applies to all of the shift
forks.
1. Check:
● Shift fork cam follower “1”
● Shift fork pawl “2”
Bends/damage/scoring/wear → Replace the
shift fork.
EAS26290
CHECKING THE TRANSMISSION
1. Measure:
● Main axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge “1”)
Out of specification → Replace the main axle.
Main axle runout limit
0.08 mm (0.0032 in)
2. Check:
● Shift fork guide bar
Roll the shift fork guide bar on a flat surface.
Bends → Replace.
EWA12840
WARNING
Do not attempt to straighten a bent shift fork
guide bar.
3. Check:
● Shift fork movement
(along the shift fork guide bar)
Rough movement → Replace the shift forks
and shift fork guide bar as a set.
2. Measure:
● Drive axle runout
(with a centering device and dial gauge “1”)
Out of specification → Replace the drive axle.
EAS26270
CHECKING THE SHIFT DRUM ASSEMBLY
1. Check:
● Shift drum groove
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace the shift
drum assembly.
● Shift drum segment “1”
Damage/wear → Replace the shift drum assembly.
● Shift drum bearing “2”
Damage/pitting → Replace the shift drum assembly.
Drive axle runout limit
0.08 mm (0.0032 in)
5-63
TRANSMISSION
3. Check:
● Transmission gears
Blue discoloration/pitting/wear → Replace
the defective gear(s).
● Transmission gear dogs
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace the defective gear(s).
4. Check:
● Transmission gear engagement
(each pinion gear to its respective wheel
gear)
Incorrect → Reassemble the transmission
axle assemblies.
NOTE:
When reassembling the main axle “1”, press the
2nd pinion gear “2” onto it as shown.
2. Check:
● Transmission
Rough movement → Repair.
NOTE:
Oil each gear, shaft, and bearing thoroughly.
a. 102.2–102.4 mm
5. Check:
● Transmission gear movement
Rough movement → Replace the defective
part(s).
6. Check:
● Circlips
Bends/damage/looseness → Replace.
EAS26320
INSTALLING THE SHIFT FORKS AND SHIFT
DRUM ASSEMBLY
1. Install:
● Shift fork-L “1”
● Shift fork-C
● Shift fork-R “2”
● Shift drum assembly “3”
● Shift fork guide bars “4”
NOTE:
The embossed marks (“R”/“C”/“L”) on the shift
forks should face towards the right side of the
engine.
5-64
FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL TANK ...................................................................................................6-1
CHECKING THE FUEL COCK.................................................................6-2
CARBURETOR ..............................................................................................6-3
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR ............................................................6-6
ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETOR........................................................6-7
INSTALLING THE CARBURETOR ..........................................................6-8
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM.............................................................................6-9
CHECKING THE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM ..........................................6-12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FUEL TANK
EAS26620
FUEL TANK
Removing the fuel tank
2
T.
R.
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
1
3
T.
R.
Order
1
2
3
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Left fuel tank side cover/right fuel tank side
cover
Fuel hose
Fuel tank
Fuel cock
1
1
1
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
Remarks
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page
4-1.
Disconnect.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
6-1
FUEL TANK
EAS26650
CHECKING THE FUEL COCK
1. Check:
● Fuel cock
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace.
2. Check:
● Fuel cock strainer “1”
Obstruction → clean.
Blow out the jets with compressed air.
Damage → Replace.
1
6-2
CARBURETOR
EAS26720
CARBURETOR
Removing the carburetor
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
8
8
LT
LT
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
T.
R.
1
7 3
4
6
10
9
2
5
11
Order
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Fuel tank
Remarks
Refer to “FUEL TANK” on page 6-1.
Refer to “AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM” on
page 6-9.
Air cut-off valve
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
Throttle cable
Starter plunger
Carburetor warmer coupler
Fuel hose
Intake manifold clamp screw
Carburetor joint clamp screw
Air filter case bolt
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
Disconnect.
Loosen.
Loosen.
NOTE:
8
Battery/electrical compornents box bolt
3
9
10
11
Carburetor assembly
Carburetor air vent hose
Carburetor fuel drain hose
1
2
1
Remove the air filter case bolts and the battery/electric parts box bolts, and then slide
both the air filter case and the battery/electric
parts box backward.
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
6-3
CARBURETOR
Disassembling the carburetor
4
5
6
2
3
7
10
9
8
1
13
22
21
23
20
19
17
18
16
15 New
14
11
12
Order
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Throttle stop screw
Vacuum chamber cover
Piston valve spring
Jet needle holder
Spring
Jet needle kit
Piston valve
Coasting enricher cover
Coasting enricher spring
Coasting enricher diaphragm
Carburetor warmer lead
Carburetor warmer
Pilot screw set
Float chamber
Float chamber rubber gasket
Float pin
Float
Needle valve
Needle valve seat
Main jet
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6-4
Remarks
CARBURETOR
Disassembling the carburetor
4
5
6
2
3
7
10
9
8
1
13
22
21
23
20
19
17
18
16
15 New
14
11
12
Order
21
22
23
Job/Parts to remove
Q’ty
Main jet holder
Needle jet
Pilot jet
Remarks
1
1
1
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
6-5
CARBURETOR
Cracks/tears → Replace.
EAS26760
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR
1. Check:
● Carburetor body
● Float chamber
● Jet housing
Cracks/damage → Replace.
2. Check:
● Fuel passages
Obstruction → Clean.
2
1
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Wash and clean the carburetor with a kerosene. Never use a poor volatile carburetor
cleaner.
b. Clean all carburetor passages by air blow.
7. Check:
● Vacuum chamber cover
● Piston valve spring
Cracks/damage → Replace.
8. Check:
● Coasting enricher cover
● Coasting enricher spring
● Coasting enricher diaphragm
Cracks/damage → Replace.
9. Check:
● Jet needle holder “1”
Cracks/damage → Replace.
● Jet needle kit “2”
● Needle jet “3”
● Pilot screw set “4”
● Pilot jet “5”
● Main jet “6”
● Main jet holder “7”
Bends/damage/wear → Replace.
Obstruction → Blow out with compressed air.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Check:
● Float chamber body
Dirt → Clean.
4. Check:
● Float
Damage → Replace.
5. Check:
● Needle valve “1”
● Needle valve seat “2”
Damage/obstruction/wear → Replace the
needle valve and needle valve seat.
1 2
7
3
5
6
4
10.Check:
● Piston valve movement
Insert the piston valve into the carburetor
body and move it up and down.
Tightness → Replace the piston valve.
11.Check:
● Starter plunger
● Starter plunger spring
Bends/cracks/damage → Replace.
12.Check:
● Hose joints
2
1
6. Check:
● Piston valve “1”
Damage/scratches/wear → Replace.
● Piston valve diaphragm “2”
6-6
CARBURETOR
Cracks/damage → Replace.
13.Check:
● Carburetor air vent hose
● Carburetor fuel drain hose
● Fuel hoses
Cracks/damage/wear → Replace.
Obstruction → Clean.
Blow out the hoses with compressed air.
ber matching face to the float top face.
Float height
11.9 mm (0.47 in)
a
EAS26800
ASSEMBLING THE CARBURETOR
ECA14110
CAUTION:
● Before
assembling the carburetor, wash all
of the parts in a petroleum-based solvent.
● Always use a new gasket.
NOTE:
1. Install:
● Needle jet
● Main jet holder
● Main jet “1”
● Pilot jet “2”
● Needle valve seat “3”
Temporarily lift the float, and check the oil level
when the needle valve end slightly touches the
float tongue.
Out of specification → Bend the loat tongue
“1” and adjust.
1
3
2
1
2. Install:
● Needle valve
● Float “1”
● Float pin “2”
4. Install:
● Float chamber
● Pilot screw “1”
Pilot screw turn out
2–1/2
NOTE:
Install the float pin in the reverse direction of arrow “a”.
a
1
1
2
5. Install:
● Piston valve
● Jet needle holder
● Jet needle kit “1”
3. Check:
● Float height (dimention H) “a”
Remove the float chamber rubber gasket,
and measure the height from the float cham-
6-7
CARBURETOR
Clip position
Standard clip position
3 levels
1
2
3
4
5
1
EAS26890
INSTALLING THE CARBURETOR
1. Adjust:
● Engine idling speed
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE ENGINE IDLING
SPEED” on page 3-8.
Engine idling speed
1300–1500 r/min
2. Adjust:
● Throttle cable free play
Refer to “ADJUSTING THE THROTTLE CABLE FREE PLAY” on page 3-9.
Throttle cable free play
3.0–5.0 mm (0.12–0.20 in)
6-8
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
EAS27040
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
1
6
2
4
3
5
6-9
7
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
1. Cylinder head
2. Air induction system pipe
3. Air induction system hose (from the air cut-off
valve to the cylinder head)
4. Air induction system vacuum hose
5. Air cut-off valve
6. Air induction system hose (from the air filter to the
air cut-off valve)
7. Air filter case
6-10
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Removing the air cut-off valve and hose
4
3
1
T.
R.
7 Nm (0.7 m • kg, 5.1 ft • Ib)
2
Order
1
2
3
4
Job/Part
Q’ty
Fuel tank
Air induction system vacuum hose
Air induction system hose (from the air cut-off
valve to the cylinder head)
Air cut-off valve
Air induction system hose (from the air filter to
the air cut-off valve)
Remarks
Refer to “FUEL TANK” on page 6-1.
1
1
1
1
For installation, reverse the removal procedure.
6-11
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Cracks/damage → Replace the reed valve.
EAS27060
CHECKING THE AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
Air induction
The air induction system burns unburned exhaust gases by injecting fresh air (secondary air)
into the exhaust port, reducing the emission of
carbon monoxide. When there is negative pressure at the exhaust port, the reed valve opens,
allowing secondary air to flow into the exhaust
port. The required temperature for burning the
unburned exhaust gases is approximately 600
to 700°C.
Air cut-off valve
The air cut-off valve is controlled by the intake
gas pressure from the intake manifold. Ordinarily, the air cut-off valve opens to allow the air to
flow during idle and closes to cut-off the flow
when the vehicle is being driven. If the pressure
drops when the engine speed is high, the
air-cutoff valve is closed automatically.
A
B
C
A. From the air filter
B. From the intake manifold
C. To the cylinder head
1. Check:
● Hoses
Loose connections → Connect properly.
Cracks/damage → Replace.
● Pipes
Cracks/damage → Replace.
Refer to “CYLINDER HEAD” on page 5-6.
2. Check:
● Air cut-off valve
6-12
AIR INDUCTION SYSTEM
6-13
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
IGNITION SYSTEM ........................................................................................7-1
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................................................................................7-1
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................7-3
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM...................................................................7-5
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................................................................................7-5
STARTING CIRCUIT CUT-OFF SYSTEM OPERATION.........................7-7
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................7-9
CHARGING SYSTEM ....................................................................................7-11
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................................................................................7-11
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................7-13
LIGHTING SYSTEM.......................................................................................7-15
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................................................................................7-15
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................7-17
SIGNALING SYSTEM ....................................................................................7-19
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................................................................................7-19
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................7-21
CARBURETOR HEATING SYSTEM .............................................................7-25
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM .................................................................................7-25
TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................................7-27
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................................7-29
CHECKING THE SWITCHES ..................................................................7-33
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB SOCKETS ....................................7-36
CHECKING THE FUSE............................................................................7-37
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY........................................7-37
CHECKING THE RELAYS .......................................................................7-40
CHECKING THE TURN SIGNAL RELAY ................................................7-41
CHECKING THE DIODE..........................................................................7-42
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG CAP......................................................7-42
CHECKING THE IGNITION COIL............................................................7-43
CHECKING THE PICKUP COIL ..............................................................7-44
CHECKING THE STATOR COIL .............................................................7-44
CHECKING THE RECTIFIER/REGULATOR...........................................7-45
CHECKING THE HORN...........................................................................7-45
CHECKING THE SPEED SENSOR.........................................................7-46
CHECKING THE THERMO SWITCH ......................................................7-46
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR WARMER...........................................7-47
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
(BLACK)
W/L W/R
(BLACK)
2
1
B
B
B
W
R
R R
W
W
W
B
B
B
B
%
7-1
B
B
B
B
P
Dg
$
Y Dg Ch
L/B Ch Br/W
B
B/Y
B/Y
B/Y
Br
R/W
Br
(BLACK)
R R
Br R/W
B
3
B/Y
B
4
7
5B
R
R
R
R
W
W
B/Y Br
6
W/L
W/R
W
W
W
20A
R/W
Br
P
B
.
R/W
Br
8
Ch Dg
Y
G
R/W
G
v
B
B
Y G
Y
GY
Ch
B
c
L
N
R
B
Ch
L
L/B
L/B
L/W
L/W
B
L/B B/W
(GRAY)
Ch
B
(BLACK)
Dg
B
B
(BLACK)
B
(GRAY)
z
B
B B
n
;
Br
y
G/Y
(BLACK)
G/W
(BLACK)
Dg
L
L/B
L/W L/B
Ch
B
Dg
B
B
L/B
L/W
G/Y Br
e
L/W
B
Ch
Dg
Br
Br/W
B/W
x
Ch Dg
Br/W
Br/W
m
Br
t
r
w
B/W
B
q
R/W
OFF
ON
OFF
RUN
HI
LO
L/B
L/B
W/B
, Br Br
B/W L/W
B
B R/W
L/W R/W
0
(RED)
OFF
PUSH
Y
W/B
R
#
B B
Br
Br
L/B
Br
L/B L/Y
@
P
L/B
(RED)
Br/L
R
L/Y
!
P
Br
Br L/Y
L/B
B
Y
(BLACK)
ON
OFF
LOCK
9R
Br/W Ch L
Dg
/
R
Br
B
l
B
B
(BLACK)
Y L B
Y L
Y L
G/Y
Br
Lg
Br G/Y
Lg
Sb
u
k
(BROWN)
L/W
B/W
Lg
Br
W B
(BROWN)
B
b
Lg
B/W
L/W
W
B
Sb
B
W
B
W
B
Sb
Dg
Ch
Y
Br
R/G
W
B
Sb
Sb
Sb
Br
R/G B/W
R/L
B/W R/G
R/W R/L
s
i
Sb
W/R O
R/L W/L B
(BLACK)
W L/Y W/B
W W R/B
CARB. WARMER
B/Y
MAIN HARNESS
B/Y
(BLACK)
B
(BLACK)
A
B
Sb
W
Sb
B
W/B W/R
g
f
R/B
W/B
L/Y
W
W
W
W/L
W/R
Y Dg Ch
Ch Dg Y
j
h
d
R/L
W
(GRAY)
B
O
R/L
B/W
Sb
B
O
SPEED SENSOR
B
B
o
MAIN HARNESS
(GRAY)
W
B
Y
a
p
MAIN HARNESS
(BLACK)
L
C
Y
B
L
TAIL LIGHT
(BLACK)
IGNITION SYSTEM
EAS27090
IGNITION SYSTEM
EAS27100
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
IGNITION SYSTEM
1. Pickup coil
2. A.C. magneto
4. Fuse
6. Battery
9. Main switch
10. Right handlebar switch
11. Engine stop switch
13. Diode
15. Sidestand switch
16. Starting circuit cut-off relay
17. Diode 3
18. Neutral switch
19. C.D.I. unit
20. Ignition coil
21. Spark plug
7-2
IGNITION SYSTEM
EAS27130
TROUBLESHOOTING
The ignition system fails to operate (no spark or intermittent spark).
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1.Seat
2.Rear side cover
3.Tool box
4.Fuel tank
5.Carburetor assembly
6.Starter (choke) knob
1. Check the fuse.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” on
page 7-37.
NG→
Replace the fuse(s).
OK↓
2. Check the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY” on page 7-37.
NG→
● Clean
the battery terminals.
or replace the battery.
● Recharge
OK↓
3. Check the spark plug.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SPARK
PLUG” on page 3-8.
NG→
Re-gap or replace the spark plug.
NG→
Replace the spark plug cap.
NG→
Replace the ignition coil.
NG→
Replace the pickup coil/stator assembly.
NG→
Replace the pickup coil/stator assembly.
NG→
Replace the main switch.
NG→
Poor conducting of engine stop switch.
Replace the right handlebar switch.
OK↓
4. Check the spark plug cap.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SPARK
PLUG CAP” on page 7-42.
OK↓
5. Check the ignition coil.
Refer to “CHECKING THE IGNITION
COIL” on page 7-43.
OK↓
6. Check the pickup coil.
Refer to “CHECKING THE PICKUP
COIL” on page 7-44.
OK↓
7. Check the stator coil.
Refer to .
OK↓
8. Check the main switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
9. Check the engine stop switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
7-3
IGNITION SYSTEM
10.Check the sidestand switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
NG→
Replace the sidestand switch.
NG→
Replace the clutch switch.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the ignition
system's wiring.
OK↓
11.Check the clutch switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
12.Checking the entire ignition system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-1.
OK↓
Replace the C.D.I. unit.
7-4
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
(BLACK)
W/L W/R
(BLACK)
2
1
B
B
B
W
R
R R
W
W
W
B
B
B
B
%
7-5
B
B
B
B
P
Dg
$
Y Dg Ch
L/B Ch Br/W
B
B/Y
B/Y
B/Y
Br
R/W
Br
(BLACK)
R R
Br R/W
B
3
B/Y
B
4
7
5B
R
R
R
R
W
W
B/Y Br
6
W/L
W/R
W
W
W
20A
R/W
Br
P
B
.
R/W
Br
8
Ch Dg
Y
R/W
G
v
B
B
Y G
Y
GY
Ch
B
c
L
N
R
B
Ch
L
L/B
L/B
L/W
L/W
B
L/B B/W
(GRAY)
Ch
B
(BLACK)
Dg
B
B
(BLACK)
B
(GRAY)
z
B
B B
n
;
Br
y
G/Y
(BLACK)
G/W
(BLACK)
Dg
L
L/B
L/W L/B
Ch
B
Dg
B
B
L/B
L/W
G/Y Br
e
L/W
B
Ch
Dg
Br
Br/W
B/W
x
Ch Dg
Br/W
Br/W
m
Br
t
r
w
B/W
B
q
R/W
OFF
ON
OFF
RUN
HI
LO
L/B
L/B
W/B
, Br Br
B/W L/W
B
B R/W
L/W R/W
0
(RED)
OFF
PUSH
Y
W/B
R
#
B B
Br
Br
L/B
Br
L/B L/Y
@
P
L/B
(RED)
Br/L
R
L/Y
!
P
Br
L/Y
L/B
G
Br
B
Y
(BLACK)
ON
OFF
LOCK
9R
Br/W Ch L
Dg
/
R
B
l
B
B
(BLACK)
Y L B
Y L
Y L
G/Y
Br
Lg
Br G/Y
Lg
Sb
u
k
(BROWN)
L/W
B/W
Lg
Br
W B
(BROWN)
B
b
Lg
B/W
Br
L/W
W
B
Sb
B
W
B
W
B
Sb
Dg
Ch
Y
Br
R/G
W
B
Sb
Sb
Sb
Br
R/G B/W
R/L
B/W R/G
R/W R/L
s
i
Sb
W/R O
R/L W/L B
(BLACK)
W L/Y W/B
W W R/B
CARB. WARMER
B/Y
MAIN HARNESS
B/Y
(BLACK)
B
(BLACK)
A
B
Sb
W
Sb
B
W/B W/R
g
f
R/B
W/B
L/Y
W
W
W
W/L
W/R
Y Dg Ch
Ch Dg Y
j
h
d
R/L
W
(GRAY)
B
O
R/L
B/W
Sb
B
O
SPEED SENSOR
B
B
o
MAIN HARNESS
(GRAY)
W
B
Y
a
p
MAIN HARNESS
(BLACK)
L
C
Y
B
L
TAIL LIGHT
(BLACK)
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS27160
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS27170
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
4. Fuse
5. Starter relay
6. Battery
7. Starter motor
8. Diode 1
9. Main switch
10. Right handlebar switch
11. Engine stop switch
12. Start switch
13. Diode 2
14. Clutch switch
15. Sidestand switch
16. Starting circuit cut-off relay
17. Diode 3
18. Neutral switch
7-6
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS27180
STARTING CIRCUIT CUT-OFF SYSTEM OPERATION
If the engine stop switch is set to “ ” and the main switch is set to “ON” (both switches are closed), the
starter motor can only operate if at least one of the following conditions is met:
● The transmission is in neutral (the neutral switch is closed).
● The clutch lever is pulled to the handlebar (the clutch switch is closed) and the sidestand is up (the
sidestand switch is closed).
The starting circuit cut-off relay prevents the starter motor from operating when neither of these conditions has been met. In this instance, the starting circuit cut-off relay is open so current cannot reach the
starter motor. If any of the above has occurred and if the starting circuit cut-off relay is turned ON, you
can start the engine by pressing starter switch “ ”.
14
13
12
1
2
11
3
10
5
4
6
9
b
7
8
a
7-7
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
a. WHEN THE TRANSMISSION IS IN NEUTRAL
b. WHEN THE SIDESTAND IS UP AND THE
CLUTCH LEVER IS PULLED TO THE
HANDLEBAR
1. Battery
2. Fuse
3. Main switch
4. Diode2
5. Clutch switch
6. Sidestand switch
7. Engine stop switch
8. Neutral switch
9. Diode3
10. Starting circuit cut-off relay
11. Start switch
12. Diode1
13. Starter relay
14. Starter motor
7-8
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
EAS27190
TROUBLESHOOTING
The starter motor fails to turn.
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1.Seat
2.Rear side cover
3.Tool box
4.Fuel tank
5.Carburetor assembly
1. Check the fuse.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” on
page 7-37.
NG→
Replace the fuse(s).
OK↓
2. Check the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY” on page 7-37.
NG→
● Clean
the battery terminals.
or replace the battery.
● Recharge
OK↓
3. Check the starter motor.
Refer to “CHECKING THE STARTER
MOTOR” on page 5-52.
NG→
Repair or replace the starter motor.
NG→
Replace the starting circuit cut-off relay.
NG→
Replace the diode2.
NG→
Replace the diode3.
NG→
Replace the starter relay.
NG→
Replace the main switch.
NG→
Poor conducting of engine stop switch.
Replace the right handlebar switch.
OK↓
4. Check the starting circuit cut-off
relay.
Refer to “CHECKING THE RELAYS”
on page 7-40.
OK↓
5. Check the diode2.
Refer to “CHECKING THE DIODE” on
page 7-42.
OK↓
6. Check the diode3.
Refer to “CHECKING THE DIODE” on
page 7-42.
OK↓
7. Check the starter relay.
Refer to “CHECKING THE RELAYS”
on page 7-40.
OK↓
8. Check the main switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
9. Checking the engine stop switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
7-9
ELECTRIC STARTING SYSTEM
10.Check the engine stop switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
NG→
Replace the right handlebar switch.
NG→
Replace the neutral switch.
NG→
Replace the sidestand switch.
NG→
Replace the clutch switch.
NG→
Poor conducting of engine stop switch.
Replace the right handlebar switch.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the starting
system’s wiring
OK↓
11.Check the neutral switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
12.Check the sidestand switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
13.Check the clutch switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
14.Check the start switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
15.Check the entire starting system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-5.
OK↓
The starting system circuit is OK.
7-10
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
(BLACK)
W/L W/R
(BLACK)
2
1
7-11
B
B
B
W
R
R R
W
W
W
B
B
%
B
B
B
B
P
Dg
$
L/B Ch Br/W
B
B/Y
B/Y
B/Y
Br
R/W
Br
(BLACK)
R R
Br R/W
B
3
B/Y
B
4
7
B
R
B
5B
R
R
R
W
W
B/Y Br
6
W/L
W/R
W
W
W
20A
R/W
Br
P
B
.
R/W
Br
8
ON
OFF
LOCK
9R
Br/W Ch L
Dg
/
R
#
L
N
R
HI
LO
L/B
L/B
W/B
, Br Br
B/W
B
Br/W
Br/W
m
Br
t
r
w
q
Br
Br/W
B/W
L/B
L/B
L/W
L/W
R/W
OFF
ON
OFF
RUN
@
W/B
R/W
B/W L/W
B
B R/W
L/W R/W
0
(RED)
OFF
PUSH
P
Br
Br
L/B
R
L/B L/Y
Br
!
P
Br
Br L/Y
L/B
L/B
L/Y
(RED)
Br/L
R
B
B
B
B
L/W
L/B
L/B B/W
L/W L/B
L/B
(BLACK)
G/Y Br
e
L/W
Br
G/Y
(BLACK)
B B
n
y
Br
B
G/Y
Br
(BLACK)
Br G/Y
Lg
Sb
u
Lg
k
(BROWN)
L/W
B/W
Lg
Br
W B
(BROWN)
B
b
Lg
B/W
L/W
W
B
Sb
B
W
B
W
W W
MAIN
(B
CHARGING SYSTEM
EAS27200
CHARGING SYSTEM
EAS27210
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
CHARGING SYSTEM
2.
3.
4.
6.
A.C. magneto
Rectifier/regulator
Fuse
Battery
7-12
CHARGING SYSTEM
EAS27220
TROUBLESHOOTING
The battery is not being charged.
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1.Seat
2.Rear side cover
3.Fuel tank
4.Carburetor assembly
1. Check the fuse.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” on
page 7-37.
NG→
Replace the fuse.
OK↓
2. Check the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY” on page 7-37.
NG→
● Clean
the battery terminals.
or replace the battery.
● Recharge
OK↓
3. Check the stator coil.
Refer to “CHECKING THE STATOR
COIL” on page 7-44.
NG→
Replace the stator assembly.
NG→
Replace the rectifier/regulator.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the charging
system’s wiring.
OK↓
4. Check the rectifier/regulator.
Refer to “CHECKING THE RECTIFIER/REGULATOR” on page 7-45.
OK↓
5. Check the entire charging system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-11.
OK↓
This circuit is OK.
7-13
CHARGING SYSTEM
7-14
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
(BLACK)
W/L W/R
(BLACK)
2
1
B
B
B
W
R
R R
W
W
W
B
B
B
B
%
7-15
B
B
B
B
P
Dg
$
Y Dg Ch
L/B Ch Br/W
B
B/Y
B/Y
B/Y
Br
R/W
Br
(BLACK)
R R
Br R/W
B
3
B/Y
B
4
7
5B
R
R
R
R
W
W
B/Y Br
6
W/L
W/R
W
W
W
20A
R/W
Br
P
B
.
R/W
Br
8
Ch Dg
Y
G
R/W
G
v
B
B
Y G
Y
GY
Ch
B
c
L
N
R
B
Ch
L
L/B
L/B
L/W
L/W
B
L/B B/W
(GRAY)
Ch
B
(BLACK)
Dg
B
B
(BLACK)
B
(GRAY)
z
B
B B
n
;
Br
y
G/Y
(BLACK)
G/W
(BLACK)
Dg
L
L/B
L/W L/B
Ch
B
Dg
B
B
L/B
L/W
G/Y Br
e
L/W
B
Ch
Dg
Br
Br/W
B/W
x
Ch Dg
Br/W
Br/W
m
Br
t
r
w
B/W
B
q
R/W
OFF
ON
OFF
RUN
HI
LO
L/B
L/B
W/B
, Br Br
B/W L/W
B
B R/W
L/W R/W
0
(RED)
OFF
PUSH
Y
W/B
R
#
B B
Br
Br
L/B
Br
L/B L/Y
@
P
L/B
(RED)
Br/L
R
L/Y
!
P
Br
Br L/Y
L/B
B
Y
(BLACK)
ON
OFF
LOCK
9R
Br/W Ch L
Dg
/
R
Br
B
l
B
B
(BLACK)
Y L B
Y L
Y L
G/Y
Br
Lg
Br G/Y
Lg
Sb
u
k
(BROWN)
L/W
B/W
Lg
Br
W B
(BROWN)
B
b
Lg
B/W
L/W
W
B
Sb
B
W
B
W
B
Sb
Dg
Ch
Y
Br
R/G
W
B
Sb
Sb
Sb
Br
R/G B/W
R/L
B/W R/G
R/W R/L
s
i
Sb
W/R O
R/L W/L B
(BLACK)
W L/Y W/B
W W R/B
CARB. WARMER
B/Y
MAIN HARNESS
B/Y
(BLACK)
B
(BLACK)
A
B
Sb
W
Sb
B
W/B W/R
g
f
R/B
W/B
L/Y
W
W
W
W/L
W/R
Y Dg Ch
Ch Dg Y
j
h
d
R/L
W
(GRAY)
B
O
R/L
B/W
Sb
B
O
SPEED SENSOR
B
B
o
MAIN HARNESS
(GRAY)
W
B
Y
a
p
MAIN HARNESS
(BLACK)
L
C
Y
B
L
TAIL LIGHT
(BLACK)
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EAS27240
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EAS27250
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
LIGHTING SYSTEM
4. Fuse
6. Battery
9. Main switch
19. C. D. I. unit
22. Meter assembly
26. High beam indicator light
29. Tail/brake light
31. Front turn signal light (right)
32. Front turn signal light (left)
34. Headlight
38. Headlight relay
40. Left handlebar switch
42. Dimmer switch
7-16
LIGHTING SYSTEM
EAS27260
TROUBLESHOOTING
Any of the following fail to light: headlight, high beam indicator light, taillight, license light or meter light.
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1.Seat
2.Rear side cover
3.Tool box
1. Check the each bulbs and bulb
sockets condition.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS
NG→
Replace the bulb(s), bulb socket(s) or both.
NG→
Replace the fuse(s).
AND BULB SOCKETS” on page 7-36.
OK↓
2. Check the fuse.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” on
page 7-37.
OK↓
3. Check the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY” on page 7-37.
NG→
● Clean
the battery terminals.
or replace the battery.
● Recharge
OK↓
4. Check the main switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
NG→
Replace the main switch.
NG→
The dimmer switch is faulty. Replace the left
handlebar switch.
NG→
Replace the headlight relay.
NG→
Replace the headlight relay.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the lighting
system’s wiring.
OK↓
5. Check the dimmer switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
6. Check the headlight relay (on/off).
Refer to “CHECKING THE RELAYS”
on page 7-40.
OK↓
7. Check the headlight relay (dimmer).
Refer to “CHECKING THE RELAYS”
on page 7-40.
OK↓
8. Check the entire lighting system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-15.
OK↓
This circuit is OK.
7-17
LIGHTING SYSTEM
7-18
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
(BLACK)
W/L W/R
(BLACK)
2
1
B
B
B
W
R
R R
W
W
W
B
B
B
B
%
7-19
B
B
B
B
P
Dg
$
Y Dg Ch
L/B Ch Br/W
B
B/Y
B/Y
B/Y
Br
R/W
Br
(BLACK)
R R
Br R/W
B
3
B/Y
B
4
7
5B
R
R
R
R
W
W
B/Y Br
6
W/L
W/R
W
W
W
20A
R/W
Br
P
B
.
R/W
Br
8
Ch Dg
Y
G
R/W
G
v
B
B
Y G
Y
GY
Ch
B
c
L
N
R
B
Ch
L
L/B
L/B
L/W
L/W
B
L/B B/W
(GRAY)
Ch
B
(BLACK)
Dg
B
B
(BLACK)
B
(GRAY)
z
B
B B
n
;
Br
y
G/Y
(BLACK)
G/W
(BLACK)
Dg
L
L/B
L/W L/B
Ch
B
Dg
B
B
L/B
L/W
G/Y Br
e
L/W
B
Ch
Dg
Br
Br/W
B/W
x
Ch Dg
Br/W
Br/W
m
Br
t
r
w
B/W
B
q
R/W
OFF
ON
OFF
RUN
HI
LO
L/B
L/B
W/B
, Br Br
B/W L/W
B
B R/W
L/W R/W
0
(RED)
OFF
PUSH
Y
W/B
R
#
B B
Br
Br
L/B
Br
L/B L/Y
@
P
L/B
(RED)
Br/L
R
L/Y
!
P
Br
Br L/Y
L/B
B
Y
(BLACK)
ON
OFF
LOCK
9R
Br/W Ch L
Dg
/
R
Br
B
l
B
B
(BLACK)
Y L B
Y L
Y L
G/Y
Br
Lg
Br G/Y
Lg
Sb
u
k
(BROWN)
L/W
B/W
Lg
Br
W B
(BROWN)
B
b
Lg
B/W
L/W
W
B
Sb
B
W
B
W
B
Sb
Dg
Ch
Y
Br
R/G
W
B
Sb
Sb
Sb
Br
R/G B/W
R/L
B/W R/G
R/W R/L
s
i
Sb
W/R O
R/L W/L B
(BLACK)
W L/Y W/B
W W R/B
CARB. WARMER
B/Y
MAIN HARNESS
B/Y
(BLACK)
B
(BLACK)
A
B
Sb
W
Sb
B
W/B W/R
g
f
R/B
W/B
L/Y
W
W
W
W/L
W/R
Y Dg Ch
Ch Dg Y
j
h
d
R/L
W
(GRAY)
B
O
R/L
B/W
Sb
B
O
SPEED SENSOR
B
B
o
MAIN HARNESS
(GRAY)
W
B
Y
a
p
MAIN HARNESS
(BLACK)
L
C
Y
B
L
TAIL LIGHT
(BLACK)
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EAS27270
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EAS27280
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
SIGNALING SYSTEM
4. Fuse
6. Battery
9. Main switch
18. Neutral switch
19. C. D. I. unit
22. Meter assembly
23. Neutral indicator light
24. Multi-function display
25. Speedometer
27. Turn signal indicator light
28. Speed sensor
29. Tail/brake light
30. Rear turn signal light (right)
31. Front turn signal light (right)
32. Front turn signal light (left)
33. Rear turn signal light (left)
35. Rear brake light switch
36. Front brake light switch
37. Turn signal relay
39. Horn
40. Left handlebar switch
41. Horn switch
43. Turn signal switch
7-20
SIGNALING SYSTEM
EAS27290
TROUBLESHOOTING
● Any of the following fail to light: turn signal light, brake light or an indicator light.
● The horn fails to sound.
● The speedometer fails to operate.
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1.Seat
2.Rear side cover
3.Tool box
1. Check the fuse.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” on
page 7-37.
NG→
Replace the fuse(s).
OK↓
2. Check the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY” on page 7-37.
NG→
● Clean
the battery terminals.
or replace the battery.
● Recharge
OK↓
3. Check the main switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
NG→
Replace the main switch.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the signaling
system’s wiring.
NG→
Poor conducting of horn switch. Replace the
left handlebar switch.
NG→
Replace the horn.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the signaling
system’s wiring.
OK↓
4. Check the entire signaling system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-19.
OK↓
This circuit is OK.
Check the signaling system
The horn fails to sound.
1. Check the horn switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
2. Check the horn.
Refer to “CHECKING THE HORN” on
page 7-45.
OK↓
3. Check the entire signaling system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-19.
OK↓
This circuit is OK.
7-21
SIGNALING SYSTEM
The tail/brake light fails to come on.
1. Check the tail/brake light bulb and
socket.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS
NG→
Replace the tail/brake light bulb, socket or
both.
NG→
Replace the front brake light switch.
NG→
Replace the rear brake light switch.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the signaling
system’s wiring.
AND BULB SOCKETS” on page 7-36.
OK↓
2. Check the front brake light switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
3. Check the rear brake light switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
4. Check the entire signaling system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-19.
OK↓
This circuit is OK.
The turn signal light, turn signal indicator light or both fail to blink.
1. Check the turn signal light bulb and
socket.
Refer to “CHECKING THE BULBS
AND BULB SOCKETS” on page 7-36.
NG→
Replace the turn signal light bulb, socket or
both.
NG→
Poor conducting of turn signal switch.
Replace the left handlebar switch.
NG→
Replace the turn signal relay.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the signaling
system's wiring.
OK↓
2. Check the turn signal switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
OK↓
3. Check the turn signal relay.
Refer to “CHECKING THE RELAYS”
on page 7-40.
OK↓
4. Check the entire signaling system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-19.
OK↓
Meter assembly
7-22
SIGNALING SYSTEM
The neutral indicator light fails to come.
1. Check the neutral switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
NG→
Replace the neutral switch.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the signaling
system’s wiring.
NG→
Replace the speed sensor.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the signaling
system’s wiring.
OK↓
2. Check the entire signaling system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-19.
OK↓
This circuit is OK.
The speedometer fails to operate.
1. Check the speed sensor.
Refer to “CHECKING THE SPEED
SENSOR” on page 7-46.
OK↓
2. Check the entire signaling system’s
wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-19.
OK↓
Replace the meter assembly.
7-23
SIGNALING SYSTEM
7-24
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
(BLACK)
W/L W/R
(BLACK)
2
1
B
B
7-25
W
R
R R
W
W
W
B
B
B
B
%
B
B
B
B
P
Dg
$
Y Dg Ch
L/B Ch Br/W
B
B/Y
B/Y
B/Y
Br
R/W
Br
(BLACK)
R R
Br R/W
B
3
B/Y
B
4
7
5B
R
R
R
R
W
W
B/Y Br
B
6
W/L
W/R
W
W
W
20A
R/W
Br
P
B
.
R/W
Br
8
Ch Dg
Y
G
G
B
Y G
Y
GY
Ch
L
N
R
HI
LO
L/B
L/B
W/B
, Br Br
Ch
L
L/B
L/B
L/W
L/W
B
Dg
L
B
B
L/B
L/B B/W
L/W L/B
L/B
L/W
z
B B
n
Br
y
G/Y
(BLACK)
G/W
(BLACK)
G/Y Br
e
L/W
B
Ch
Dg
Br
Br/W
B/W
x
Ch Dg
Br/W
Br/W
m
Br
t
r
w
B/W
B
q
R/W
OFF
ON
OFF
RUN
OFF
PUSH
Y
W/B
R/W
B/W L/W
B
B R/W
L/W R/W
0
(RED)
#
B B
Br
Br
L/B
R
L/B L/Y
Br
@
P
L/B
L/Y
(RED)
Br/L
R
!
P
Br
Br L/Y
L/B
B
Y
(BLACK)
ON
OFF
LOCK
9R
Br/W Ch L
Dg
/
R
Br
B
B
B
(BLACK)
Y L B
Y L
Y L
G/Y
Br
Lg
Br G/Y
Lg
Sb
u
k
(BROWN)
L/W
B/W
Lg
Br
W B
(BROWN)
B
b
Lg
B/W
L/W
W
B
Sb
B
W
B
W
B
Sb
Dg
Ch
Y
Br
R/G
W
B
Sb
Sb
Sb
R/L
Br
B/W R/G
R/W R/L
s
i
Sb
W/R O
R/L W/L B
(BLACK)
W L/Y W/B
W W R/B
CARB. WARMER
B/Y
MAIN HARNESS
B/Y
(BLACK)
B
(BLACK)
A
W
B
W
Sb
B
W/B W/R
g
f
R/B
W/B
L/Y
W
W
W
W/L
W/R
j
h
d
R/L
B
B
SPEED
(GR
D
Y Dg Ch
o
MAIN HARNESS
(GRAY)
B
CARBURETOR HEATING SYSTEM
EAS27490
CARBURETOR HEATING SYSTEM
EAS27500
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
CARBURETOR HEATING SYSTEM
4. Fuse
6. Battery
9. Main switch
44. Thermo switch
45. Carburetor warmer
7-26
CARBURETOR HEATING SYSTEM
EAS27510
TROUBLESHOOTING
The carburetor warmer system fails to operate.
NOTE:
Before troubleshooting, remove the following part(s):
1.Seat
2.Rear side cover
3.Tool box
4.Fuel tank
5.Carburetor assembly
6.Rectifier/regulator
1. Check the fuse.
Refer to “CHECKING THE FUSE” on
page 7-37.
NG→
Replace the fuse(s).
OK↓
2. Check the battery.
Refer to “CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY” on page 7-37.
NG→
● Clean
the battery terminals.
● Recharge or replace the battery.
OK↓
3. Check the main switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE
SWITCHES” on page 7-33.
NG→
Replace the main switch.
NG→
Replace the thermo switch.
NG→
Replace the carburetor warmer.
NG→
Properly connect or repair the carburetor
heating system’s wiring.
OK↓
4. Check the thermo switch.
Refer to “CHECKING THE THERMO
SWITCH” on page 7-46.
OK↓
5. Check the carburetor warmer.
Refer to “CHECKING THE CARBURETOR WARMER” on page 7-47.
OK↓
6. Check the entire carburetor heating
system’s wiring.
Refer to “CIRCUIT DIAGRAM” on page
7-25.
OK↓
This circuit is OK.
7-27
CARBURETOR HEATING SYSTEM
7-28
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
EAS27971
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
EAS3C51017
4
3
7
2
1
5
6
8
13
12
9
11
10
7-29
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1. Main switch
2. Diode1
3. Diode3
4. Diode2
5. Fuse
6. Starter relay
7. Battery
8. Rectifier/regulator
9. Sidestand switch
10. Rear brake light switch
11. Headlight relay
12. Starting circuit cut-off relay
13. Wire harness
7-30
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
2
3
1
4
8
9
7
5
6
7-31
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Horn
CDI unit
Thermo switch
Speed sensor
Neutral switch
Carburetor warmer
Carburetor warmer lead
Ignition coil
Spark plug cap
7-32
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
EAS27980
CHECKING THE SWITCHES
6
1
2
7
3
8
9
4
10
Sb
Sb
5
Sb
11
B
7-33
B
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1. Horn switch
2. Dimmer switch
3. Turn signal switch
4. Clutch switch
5. Sidestand switch
6. Main switch
7. Engine stop switch
8. Start switch
9. Front brake light switch
10. Neutral switch
11. Rear brake light switch
7-34
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Check each switch for continuity with the pocket tester. If the continuity reading is incorrect, check the
wiring connections and if necessary, replace the switch.
ECA14370
CAUTION:
Never insert the tester probes into the coupler terminal slots “a”. Always insert the probes from
the opposite end of the coupler, taking care not to loosen or damage the leads.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
NOTE:
checking for continuity, set the pocket tester to “0” and to the “Ω × 1” range.
checking for continuity, switch back and forth between the switch positions a few times.
● Before
● When
The terminal connections for switches (e.g., main switch, engine stop switch) are shown in an illustration similar to the one on below.
The switch positions “a” are shown in the far left column and the switch lead colors “b” are shown in the
top row in the switch illustration.
NOTE:
“
” indicates a continuity of electricity between switch terminals (i.e., a closed circuit at the respective switch position).
The example illustration below shows that:
This chart shows that the switch circuit is conductive when the switch is “ON” for Red, Brown/Blue,
Blue/Black, and Blue/Yellow.
b
R
Br/L
L/B
ON
a
OFF
LOCK
R Br/L
L/Y L/B
7-35
L/Y
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
EAS27990
●
CHECKING THE BULBS AND BULB
SOCKETS
Check each bulb and bulb socket for damage or
wear, proper connections, and also for continuity between the terminals.
Damage/wear → Repair or replace the bulb,
bulb socket or both.
Improperly connected → Properly connect.
No continuity → Repair or replace the bulb, bulb
socket or both.
Types of bulbs
The bulbs used on this vehicle are shown in the
illustration on the left.
● Bulbs “a” and “b” are used for the headlights
and usually use a bulb holder that must be detached before removing the bulb. The majority
of these types of bulbs can be removed from
their respective socket by turning them counterclockwise.
● Bulbs “c” is used for turn signal and tail/brake
lights and can be removed from the socket by
pushing and turning the bulb counterclockwise.
● Bulbs “d” and “e” are used for meter and indicator lights and can be removed from their respective socket by carefully pulling them out.
Bulb
EWA13320
WARNING
Since the headlight bulb gets extremely hot,
keep flammable products and your hands
away from the bulb until it has cooled down.
ECA14380
CAUTION:
● Be
sure to hold the socket firmly when removing the bulb. Never pull the lead, otherwise it may be pulled out of the terminal in
the coupler.
● Avoid touching the glass part of the headlight bulb to keep it free from oil, otherwise
the transparency of the glass, the life of the
bulb, and the luminous flux will be adversely affected. If the headlight bulb gets soiled,
thoroughly it with a cloth moistened with
alcohol or lacquer thinner.
2. Check:
● Bulb (for continuity)
(with the pocket tester)
No continuity → Replace.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
NOTE:
Before checking for continuity, set the pocket
tester to “0” and to the “Ω × 1” range.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the positive tester probe to terminal
“1” and the negative tester probe to terminal
“2”, and check the continuity.
b. Connect the positive tester probe to terminal
“1” and the negative tester probe to terminal
“3”, and check the continuity.
c. If either of the readings indicate no continuity,
replace the bulb.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
Checking the condition of the bulbs
The following procedure applies to all of the
bulbs.
1. Remove:
7-36
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Checking the condition of the bulb sockets
The following procedure applies to all of the bulb
sockets.
1. Check:
● Bulb socket (for continuity)
(with the pocket tester)
No continuity → Replace.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Replace:
● Blown fuse
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Set the main switch to “OFF”.
b. Install a new fuse of the correct amperage
rating.
c. Set on the switches to verify if the electrical
circuit is operational.
d. If the fuse immediately blows again, check
the electrical circuit.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
NOTE:
Check each bulb socket for continuity in the
same manner as described in the bulb section;
however, note the following.
Fuse
Amperage
rating
Q’ty
Fuse
20 A
1
Reserve
20 A
1
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Install a good bulb into the bulb socket.
b. Connect the pocket tester probes to the respective leads of the bulb socket.
c. Check the bulb socket for continuity. If any of
the readings indicate no continuity, replace
the bulb socket.
EWA13310
WARNING
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS28000
CHECKING THE FUSE
The following procedure applies to all of the
fuse.
Never use a fuse with an amperage rating
other than that specified. Improvising or using a fuse with the wrong amperage rating
may cause extensive damage to the electrical system, cause the lighting and ignition
systems to malfunction and could possibly
cause a fire.
EC3C51005
CAUTION:
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
4. Install:
● Rear right side cover
● Seat
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
To avoid a shortcircuit, disconnect the negative battery lead from the battery terminal before you check or replace the fuse.
1. Remove:
● Seat
● Rear right side cover
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
2. Check:
● Fuse
EAS28030
CHECKING AND CHARGING THE BATTERY
EWA13290
WARNING
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the pocket tester to the fuse and
check the continuity.
NOTE:
Set the pocket tester selector to “Ω × 1”.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
b. If the pocket tester indicates “∞”, replace the
fuse.
7-37
Batteries generate explosive hydrogen gas
and contain electrolyte which is made of poisonous and highly caustic sulfuric acid.
Therefore, always follow these preventive
measures:
● Wear protective eye gear when handling or
working near batteries.
● Charge batteries in a well-ventilated area.
● Keep batteries away from fire, sparks or
open flames (e.g., welding equipment,
lighted cigarettes).
● DO NOT SMOKE when charging or handling batteries.
● KEEP BATTERIES AND ELECTROLYTE
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN.
bodily contact with electrolyte as it
can cause severe burns or permanent eye
injury.
FIRST AID IN CASE OF BODILY CONTACT:
EXTERNAL
● Skin — Wash with water.
● Eyes — Flush with water for 15 minutes and
get immediate medical attention.
INTERNAL
● Drink large quantities of water or milk followed with milk of magnesia, beaten egg or
vegetable oil. Get immediate medical attention.
2
● Avoid
3
1
3. Remove:
● Battery
4. Check:
● Battery charge
ECA13660
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
CAUTION:
is a sealed battery. Never remove the
sealing caps because the balance between
cells will not be maintained and battery performance will deteriorate.
● Charging time, charging amperage and
charging voltage for an MF battery are different from those of conventional batteries.
The MF battery should be charged as explained in the charging method illustrations. If the battery is overcharged, the
electrolyte level will drop considerably.
Therefore, take special care when charging
the battery.
a. Connect a pocket tester to the battery terminals.
● This
Positive tester probe →
Positive battery terminal
Negative tester probe →
Negative battery terminal
NOTE:
● The
charge state of an MF battery can be
checked by measuring its open-circuit voltage
(i.e., the voltage when the positive battery terminal is disconnected).
● No charging is necessary when the open-circuit voltage equals or exceeds 12.8 V.
NOTE:
b. Check the charge of the battery, as shown in
the charts and the following example.
Since MF batteries are sealed, it is not possible
to check the charge state of the battery by measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte.
Therefore, the charge of the battery has to be
checked by measuring the voltage at the battery
terminals.
Example
Open-circuit voltage = 12.0 V
Charging time = 6.5 hours
Charge of the battery = 20–30%
1. Remove:
● Seat
● Rear right side cover
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
2. Disconnect:
● Battery band “1”
Battery leads
(from the battery terminals)
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
5. Charge:
● Battery
(refer to the appropriate charging method illustration)
EWA13300
EC3C51008
WARNING
CAUTION:
Do not quick charge a battery.
Always disconnect negative battery lead “2”
first, and then disconnect positive battery
lead “3”.
EC3C51007
CAUTION:
● Never
remove the MF battery sealing caps.
● Do not use a high-rate battery charger.
They force a high-amperage current into
7-38
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
voltage adjust dial at 20–24 V and monitor the
amperage for 3–5 minutes to check the battery.
the battery quickly and can cause battery
overheating and battery plate damage.
● If it is impossible to regulate the charging
current on the battery charger, be careful
not to overcharge the battery.
● Remove the battery when charging it. (If
charging has to be done with the battery
mounted on the vehicle, disconnect the
negative lead from the battery terminal.)
● To reduce the chance of sparks, do not
plug in the battery charger until the battery
charger leads are connected to the battery.
● Before removing the battery charger lead
clips from the battery terminals, be sure to
turn off the battery charger.
● Make sure the battery charger lead clips are
in full contact with the battery terminal and
that they are not shorted. A corroded battery charger lead clip may generate heat in
the contact area and a weak clip spring may
cause sparks.
● When the battery is charging, if abnormal
heat is generated, disconnect the battery
from the charger and allow the battery to
cool down. Recharge the battery after its
temperature has dropped. Hot batteries
can explode!
● The open-circuit voltage of a MF battery
stabilizes about 30 minutes after charging
has been completed. Therefore, wait 30
minutes after charging is completed before
measuring the open-circuit voltage.
Reach the standard charging current
Battery is good.
Does not reach the standard charging
current
Replace the battery.
d. Adjust the voltage so that the current is at the
standard charging level.
e. Set the time according to the charging time
suitable for the open-circuit voltage.
Refer to “Battery condition checking steps”.
f. If charging requires more than 5 hours, it is
advisable to check the charging current after
a lapse of 5 hours. If there is any change in
the amperage, readjust the voltage to obtain
the standard charging current.
g. Measure the battery open-circuit voltage after leaving the battery unused for more than
30 minutes.
12.8 V or more --- Charging is complete.
12.7 V or less --- Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V --- Replace the battery.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Charging method using a constant voltage
charger
a. Measure the open-circuit voltage before
charging.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Charging method using a variable-current
(voltage) charger
a. Measure the open-circuit voltage before
charging.
NOTE:
Voltage should be measured 30 minutes after
the machine is stopped.
b. Connect a charger and AMP meter to the battery and start charging.
c. Make sure that the current is higher than the
standard charging current written on the battery.
NOTE:
Voltage should be measured 30 minutes after
the machine is stopped.
b. Connect a charged and AMP meter to the
battery and start charging.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Set the charging voltage at 16–17 V.If the setting
is lower, charging will be insufficient. If too high,
the battery will be over-charged.
If the current is lower than the standard charging
current written on the battery, This type of battery charger cannot charge the MF battery. A
variable voltage charger is recommended.
c. Make sure that the current is higher than the
standard charging current written on the battery.
d. Charge the battery until the battery’s charging voltage is 15 V.
NOTE:
NOTE:
Set the charging time at 20 hours (maximum).
If the current is lower than the standard charging
current written on the battery, set the charging
e. Measure the battery open-circuit voltage af-
7-39
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1. Disconnect the relay from the wire harness.
2. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) and battery
(12 V) to the relay terminal as shown.
Check the relay operation.
Out of specification → Replace.
Starter relay
ter leaving the battery unused for more than
30 minutes.
12.8 V or more --- Charging is complete.
12.7 V or less --- Recharging is required.
Under 12.0 V --- Replace the battery.
3
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
6. Install:
● Battery
7. Connect:
● Battery leads
(to the battery terminals)
2
ECA13630
CAUTION:
1
4
First, connect the positive battery lead “1”,
and then the negative battery lead “2”.
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
Positive battery terminal
Negative battery terminal
Positive tester probe
Negative tester probe
Result
Continuity
(between “3” and “4”)
Starting circuit cut-off relay
3
4
8. Check:
● Battery terminals
Dirt → Clean with a wire brush.
Loose connection → Connect properly.
9. Lubricate:
● Battery terminals
2
Recommended lubricant
Dielectric grease
1.
2.
3.
4.
10.Install:
● Battery band
11.Install:
● Rear right side cover
● Seat
Refer to “GENERAL CHASSIS” on page 4-1.
+
1
Positive battery terminal
Negative battery terminal
Positive tester probe
Negative tester probe
Result
Continuity
(between “3” and “4”)
EAS28040
CHECKING THE RELAYS
Check each switch for continuity with the pocket
tester. If the continuity reading is incorrect, replace the relay.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
7-40
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Headlight relay
3
4
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
+
1
b. Turn the main switch “ON”.
c. Measure the input voltage of the turn signal
light and hazard relay.
Positive battery terminal
Negative battery terminal
Positive tester probe
Negative tester probe
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Check:
● Turn signal light and hazard relay output voltage
Out of specification → Replace the turn signal light and hazard relay.
Result
Continuity
(between “3” and “4”)
EAS3C51015
CHECKING THE TURN SIGNAL RELAY
1. Check:
● Turn signal light relay input voltages
Out of specification → Poor circuit connection
from main switch to turn signal light relay coupler. Repair.
Turn signal light and hazard relay
output voltage
DC 12 V
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Touch probes of the pocket tester (DC 20 V)
to the turn signal light and hazard relay coupler as shown.
Turn signal light relay input voltage
DC 12 V
Pocket tester
90890-03132
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
turn signal light and hazard relay coupler as
shown.
Positive probe of the tester
Brown/white “1”
Negative probe of the tester
Ground to chassis frame
Pocket tester
90890-03132
Positive probe of the tester
Brown “1”
Negative probe of the tester
Ground to chassis frame
b. Turn the main switch “ON”.
c. Measure the output voltage of the turn signal
light and hazard relay.
7-41
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
B
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3
EAS28050
CHECKING THE DIODE
1. Check:
● Diode2
● Diode3
Out of specification → Replace.
4
Pocket tester
90890-03132
A. Diode2
B. Diode3
NOTE:
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
The following lists the specifications if you use
the pocket tester (90890-03132).
a. Disconnect the diode from the wire harness.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the diode
coupler as shown.
c. Check the diode for continuity.
d. Check the diode for no continuity.
Diode2
Continuity
Positive tester probe → Blue/
white “1”
Negative tester probe → Blue/
black “2”
No continuity
Positive tester probe → Blue/
black “2”
Negative tester probe → Blue/
white “1”
Diode3
Continuity
Positive tester probe → Sky blue
“3”
Negative tester probe → Light
green “4”
No continuity
Positive tester probe → Light
green “4”
Negative tester probe → Sky
blue “3”
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS28060
CHECKING THE SPARK PLUG CAP
1. Check:
● Spark plug cap resistance
Out of specification → Replace.
Resistance
10.0 kΩ
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the spark plug cap from the spark
plug lead.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the
spark plug cap as shown.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
A
1
2
c. Measure the spark plug cap resistance.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7-42
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
EAS28090
CHECKING THE IGNITION COIL
1. Check:
● Primary coil resistance
Out of specification → Replace.
Positive tester probe
High tension code “1”
Negative tester probe
Orange “2”
Primary coil resistance
0.18–0.27 Ω
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors from
the wire harness.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the ignition coil as shown.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
c. Measure the secondary coil resistance.
Positive tester probe
Orange “1”
Negative tester probe
Ignition coil base “2”
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
3. Check:
● Ignition spark gap
Out of specification → Follow Step 5 and later
of the ignition system troubleshooting procedure.
Refer to “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page
7-3.
Minimum ignition spark gap
6.0 mm
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Disconnect the spark plug cap from the spark
plug.
b. Connect ignition check “1” to the spark plug
as shown.
c. Measure the primary coil resistance.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
Ignition checker
90890-06754
Opama pet-4000 spark checker
YM-34487
2. Check:
● Secondary coil resistance
Out of specification → Replace.
Secondary coil resistance
6.32–9.48 kΩ
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Disconnect the spark plug cap from the ignition coil.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1k) to the ignition coil as shown.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
7-43
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
2
1
b. Measure the pickup coil resistance.
2. Spark plug cap
c. Turn the main switch “ON” and set the engine
stop switch to the “ .
d. Measure ignition spark gap “a”.
e. Press start switch “ ” to crank the engine,
and gradually increase the spark plug gap
until the engine misfires.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS28150
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS28110
CHECKING THE PICKUP COIL
1. Disconnect:
● Pickup coil coupler
(from the wire harness)
2. Check:
● Pickup coil resistance
Out of specification → Replace the pickup
coil and stator assembly.
CHECKING THE STATOR COIL
1. Disconnect:
● Stator coil coupler
(from the wire harness)
2. Check:
● Stator coil resistance
Out of specification → Replace the pickup
coil and stator assembly.
Stator coil resistance
0.560–0.840 Ω (White–white)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the stator
coil coupler as shown.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
Pickup coil resistance
279–341 Ω (Red–white)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 100) to the
pickup coil terminal as shown.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
Positive tester probe
White “1”
Negative tester probe
White “2”
Positive tester probe
White “1”
Negative tester probe
White “3”
Positive tester probe
White “1”
Negative tester probe
Red “2”
Positive tester probe
White “2”
Negative tester probe
White “3”
7-44
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS28180
CHECKING THE HORN
1. Check:
● Horn resistance
Out of specification → Replace.
1
2
Horn resistance
1.01–1.11 Ω at 20°C (68°F)
3
b. Measure the stator coil resistance.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS28170
CHECKING THE RECTIFIER/REGULATOR
1. Check:
● Rectifier/regulator input voltage
Out of specification → Replace the rectifier/
regulator.
a. Disconnect the horn leads from the horn terminals.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the horn
terminals.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
Rectifier/regulator input voltage
above 14 V at 5000 r/min
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
Positive tester probe
Horn terminal “1”
Negative tester probe
Horn terminal “2”
a. Connect a digital tachometer to the spark
plug lead of the cylinder.
b. Connect the pocket tester (DC 20 V) to the
rectifier/regulator coupler as shown.
1
Pocket tester
90890-03132
2
Positive tester probe
Red “1”
Negative tester probe
Ground to chassis frame
c. Measure the horn resistance.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
2. Check:
● Horn sound
Faulty sound → Adjust or replace.
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect a battery (12 V) to the horn.
b. Turn the adjusting screw in direction “a” or “b”
until the specified horn sound is obtained.
1
c. Start the engine and let it run at approximately 5000 r/min.
d. Measure the rectifier/regulator input voltage.
7-45
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
EAS28270
a
CHECKING THE THERMO SWITCH
1. Remove:
● Thermo switch
(from the thermostat housing)
b
EWA13830
WARNING
● Handle
the thermo switch with special care.
subject the thermo switch to strong
shocks. If the thermo switch is dropped, replace it.
● Never
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS28240
CHECKING THE SPEED SENSOR
1. Disconnect:
● Speed sensor coupler
2. Check:
● Speed sensor resistance
Out of specification → Replace.
2. Check:
● Thermo switch continuity
Out of specification → Replace the thermo
switch.
Test step
Speed sensor resistance
470–530 Ω 25 °C (77 °F)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the digital circuit tester to the speed
sensor coupler (wire harness side).
Coolant temperature
Continuity
1
Less than 16°C (61°F)
YES
2
More than 16°C (61°F)
NO
3
More than 11°C (52°F)
NO
4
Less than 11°C (52°F)
YES
Step 1 and 2: Heating phase
Step 3 and 4: Cooling phase
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the thermo switch “1” as shown.
b. Immerse the thermo switch in a container
filled with coolant “2”.
c. Place a thermometer “3” in the coolant.
Digital circuit tester
90890-03174
Model 88 Multimeter with tachometer
YU-A1927
Positive tester probe
White “1”
Negative tester probe
Black “2”
1
2
d. Slowly heat the coolant, then let it cool down
to the specified temperature.
b. Measure the speed sensor resistance.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
7-46
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
A. When the water temperature increases
B. When the water temperature decreases
e. Check the thermo switch for continuity.
▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲▲
EAS28310
CHECKING THE CARBURETOR WARMER
1. Check:
● Carburetor warmer element resistance
Out of specification → Replace.
Carburetor warmer resistance
4.7–9.5 Ω 20°C (68°F)
▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼▼
a. Remove the carburetor warmer leads from
the carburetor.
b. Connect the pocket tester (Ω × 1) to the carburetor warmer as shown.
Pocket tester
90890-03132
Positive tester probe
Carburetor warmer terminal “1”
Negative tester probe
Carburetor warmer body “2”
c. Measure the carburetor warmer resistance.
7-47
TROUBLESHOOTING
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................8-1
GENERAL INFORMATION ......................................................................8-1
STARTING FAILURES.............................................................................8-1
INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING SPEED ...................................................8-1
POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-SPEED PERFORMANCE..........................8-2
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING.......................................................................8-2
SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE...........................................................8-2
JUMPS OUT OF GEAR ...........................................................................8-2
FAULTY CLUTCH ....................................................................................8-2
OVERHEATING .......................................................................................8-3
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE.........................................................8-3
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS.................................................................8-3
UNSTABLE HANDLING...........................................................................8-3
FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING SYSTEM.......................................8-3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
TROUBLESHOOTING
Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
Clogged pilot jet
● Clogged pilot air passage
● Sucked-in air
● Damaged float
● Worn needle valve
● Improperly installed needle valve seat
● Incorrect fuel level
● Improperly installed pilot jet
● Clogged starter jet
● Faulty starter plunger
● Improperly adjusted starter cable
Electrical system
1. Battery
● Discharged battery
● Faulty battery
2. Fuse(s)
● Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse
● Improperly installed fuse
3. Spark plug(s)
● Incorrect spark plug gap
● Incorrect spark plug heat range
● Fouled spark plug
● Worn or damaged electrode
● Worn or damaged insulator
● Faulty spark plug cap
4. Ignition coil(s)
● Cracked or broken ignition coil body
● Broken or shorted primary or secondary coils
● Faulty spark plug lead
5. Ignition system
● Faulty ignitor unit
● Faulty pickup coil
● Broken generator rotor woodruff key
6. Switches and wiring
● Faulty main switch
● Faulty engine stop switch
● Broken or shorted wiring
● Faulty neutral switch
● Faulty start switch
● Faulty sidestand switch
● Faulty clutch switch
● Improperly grounded circuit
● Loose connections
7. Starting system
● Faulty starter motor
● Faulty starter relay
● Faulty starting circuit cut-off relay
● Faulty starter clutch
EAS28450
●
TROUBLESHOOTING
●
EAS28460
GENERAL INFORMATION
NOTE:
The following guide for troubleshooting does not
cover all the possible causes of trouble. It should
be helpful, however, as a guide to basic troubleshooting. Refer to the relative procedure in this
manual for checks, adjustments, and replacement of parts.
EAS28470
STARTING FAILURES
Engine
1. Cylinder(s) and cylinder head(s)
● Loose spark plug
● Loose cylinder head or cylinder
● Damaged cylinder head gasket
● Damaged cylinder gasket
● Worn or damaged cylinder
● Incorrect valve clearance
● Improperly sealed valve
● Incorrect valve-to-valve-seat contact
● Incorrect valve timing
● Faulty valve spring
● Seized valve
2. Piston(s) and piston ring(s)
● Improperly installed piston ring
● Damaged, worn or fatigued piston ring
● Seized piston ring
● Seized or damaged piston
3. Air filter
● Improperly installed air filter
● Clogged air filter element
4. Crankcase and crankshaft
● Improperly assembled crankcase
● Seized crankshaft
Fuel system
1. Fuel tank
● Empty fuel tank
● Clogged fuel filter
● Clogged fuel strainer
● Clogged fuel tank drain hose
● Clogged rollover valve
● Clogged rollover valve hose
● Deteriorated or contaminated fuel
2. Fuel pump
● Faulty fuel pump
● Faulty fuel pump relay
3. Fuel cock
● Clogged or damaged fuel hose
4. Carburetor(s)
EAS28490
INCORRECT ENGINE IDLING SPEED
Engine
1. Cylinder(s) and cylinder head(s)
8-1
TROUBLESHOOTING
Incorrect valve clearance
● Damaged valve train components
2. Air filter
● Clogged air filter element
Fuel system
1. Carburetor(s)
● Faulty starter plunger
● Loose or clogged pilot jet
● Loose or clogged pilot air jet
● Damaged or loose carburetor joint
● Improperly synchronized carburetors
● Improperly
adjusted engine idling speed
(throttle stop screw)
● Improper throttle cable free play
● Flooded carburetor
● Faulty air induction system
Electrical system
1. Battery
● Discharged battery
● Faulty battery
2. Spark plug(s)
● Incorrect spark plug gap
● Incorrect spark plug heat range
● Fouled spark plug
● Worn or damaged electrode
● Worn or damaged insulator
● Faulty spark plug cap
3. Ignition coil(s)
● Broken or shorted primary or secondary coils
● Faulty spark plug lead
● Cracked or broken ignition coil
4. Ignition system
● Faulty ignitor unit
● Faulty pickup coil
● Broken generator rotor woodruff key
EAS28530
●
FAULTY GEAR SHIFTING
Shifting is difficult
Refer to “Clutch drags”.
EAS28540
SHIFT PEDAL DOES NOT MOVE
Shift shaft
● Improperly adjusted shift rod
● Bent shift shaft
Shift drum and shift forks
● Foreign object in a shift drum groove
● Seized shift fork
● Bent shift fork guide bar
Transmission
● Seized transmission gear
● Foreign object between transmission gears
● Improperly assembled transmission
EAS28550
JUMPS OUT OF GEAR
Shift shaft
● Incorrect shift pedal position
● Improperly returned stopper lever
Shift forks
● Worn shift fork
Shift drum
● Incorrect axial play
● Worn shift drum groove
Transmission
● Worn gear dog
EAS28560
FAULTY CLUTCH
Clutch slips
1. Clutch
● Improperly assembled clutch
● Improperly adjusted clutch cable
● Loose or fatigued clutch spring
● Worn friction plate
● Worn clutch plate
2. Engine oil
● Incorrect oil level
● Incorrect oil viscosity (low)
● Deteriorated oil
Clutch drags
1. Clutch
● Unevenly tensioned clutch springs
● Warped pressure plate
● Bent clutch plate
● Swollen friction plate
● Bent clutch push rod
● Broken clutch boss
● Burnt primary driven gear bushing
● Match marks not aligned
2. Engine oil
EAS28520
POOR MEDIUM-AND-HIGH-SPEED
PERFORMANCE
Refer to “STARTING FAILURES” on page 8-1.
Engine
1. Air filter
● Clogged air filter element
2. Air intake system
● Bent, clogged or disconnected carburetor air
vent hose
● Clogged or leaking air duct
Fuel system
1. Carburetor(s)
● Faulty diaphragm
● Incorrect fuel level
● Loose or clogged main jet
2. Fuel pump
● Faulty fuel pump
8-2
TROUBLESHOOTING
Incorrect oil level
Incorrect oil viscosity (high)
● Deteriorated oil
● Cracked or damaged cap bolt O-ring
Malfunction
● Bent or damaged inner tube
● Bent or damaged outer tube
● Damaged fork spring
● Worn or damaged outer tube bushing
● Bent or damaged damper rod
● Incorrect oil viscosity
● Incorrect oil level
●
●
EAS28590
OVERHEATING
Engine
1. Cylinder head(s) and piston(s)
● Heavy carbon buildup
2. Engine oil
● Incorrect oil level
● Incorrect oil viscosity
● Inferior oil quality
Fuel system
1. Carburetor(s)
● Incorrect main jet setting
● Incorrect fuel level
● Damaged or loose carburetor joint
2. Air filter
● Clogged air filter element
Chassis
1. Brake(s)
● Dragging brake
Electrical system
1. Spark plug(s)
● Incorrect spark plug gap
● Incorrect spark plug heat range
2. Ignition system
● Faulty ignitor unit
EAS28690
UNSTABLE HANDLING
1. Handlebar
● Bent or improperly installed handlebar
2. Steering head components
● Improperly installed upper bracket
● Improperly installed lower bracket
(improperly tightened ring nut)
● Bent steering stem
● Damaged ball bearing or bearing race
3. Front fork leg(s)
● Uneven oil levels (both front fork legs)
● Unevenly tensioned fork spring (both front
fork legs)
● Broken fork spring
● Bent or damaged inner tube
● Bent or damaged outer tube
4. Swingarm
● Worn bearing or bushing
● Bent or damaged swingarm
5. Rear shock absorber assembly(-ies)
● Faulty rear shock absorber spring
● Leaking oil or gas
6. Tire(s)
● Uneven tire pressures (front and rear)
● Incorrect tire pressure
● Uneven tire wear
7. Wheel(s)
● Incorrect wheel balance
● Broken or loose spoke
● Damaged wheel bearing
● Bent or loose wheel axle
● Excessive wheel runout
8. Frame
● Bent frame
● Damaged steering head pipe
● Improperly installed bearing race
EAS28620
POOR BRAKING PERFORMANCE
● Worn brake pad
● Worn brake disc
● Air in hydraulic brake system
● Leaking brake fluid
● Faulty brake caliper kit
● Faulty brake caliper seal
● Loose the union bolt
● Damaged brake hose
● Oil or grease on the brake disc
● Oil or grease on the brake pad
● Incorrect brake fluid level
EAS28660
FAULTY FRONT FORK LEGS
Leaking oil
● Bent, damaged or rusty inner tube
● Cracked or damaged outer tube
● Improperly installed oil seal
● Damaged oil seal lip
● Incorrect oil level (high)
● Loose damper rod assembly bolt
● Damaged damper rod assembly bolt copper
washer
EAS28710
FAULTY LIGHTING OR SIGNALING SYSTEM
Headlight does not come on
● Wrong headlight bulb
● Too many electrical accessories
● Hard charging
8-3
TROUBLESHOOTING
● Incorrect
connection
grounded circuit
● Poor contacts (main or light switch)
● Burnt-out headlight bulb
Headlight bulb burnt out
● Wrong headlight bulb
● Faulty battery
● Faulty rectifier/regulator
● Improperly grounded circuit
● Faulty main switch
● Faulty light switch
● Headlight bulb life expired
Tail/brake light does not come on
● Wrong tail/brake light bulb
● Too many electrical accessories
● Incorrect connection
● Burnt-out tail/brake light bulb
Tail/brake light bulb burnt out
● Wrong tail/brake light bulb
● Faulty battery
● Incorrectly adjusted rear brake light switch
● Tail/brake light bulb life expired
Turn signal does not come on
● Faulty turn signal switch
● Faulty turn signal relay
● Burnt-out turn signal bulb
● Incorrect connection
● Damaged or faulty wire harness
● Improperly grounded circuit
● Faulty battery
● Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse
Turn signal blinks slowly
● Faulty turn signal relay
● Faulty main switch
● Faulty turn signal switch
● Incorrect turn signal bulb
Turn signal remains lit
● Faulty turn signal relay
● Burnt-out turn signal bulb
Turn signal blinks quickly
● Incorrect turn signal bulb
● Faulty turn signal relay
● Burnt-out turn signal bulb
Horn does not sound
● Improperly adjusted horn
● Damaged or faulty horn
● Faulty main switch
● Faulty horn switch
● Faulty battery
● Blown, damaged or incorrect fuse
● Faulty wire harness
● Improperly
8-4
EAS28740
EAS28750
WIRING DIAGRAM
COLOR CODE
XT250X/XT250XC 2008
B
Black
1.Pickup coil
2.A.C. magneto
3.Rectifier/regulator
4.Fuse
5.Starter relay
6.Battery
7.Starter motor
8.Diode 1
9.Main switch
10.Right handlebar switch
11.Engine stop switch
12.Start switch
13.Diode 2
14.Clutch switch
15.Sidestand switch
16.Starting circuit cut-off relay
17.Diode 3
18.Neutral switch
19.C. D. I. unit
20.Ignition coil
21.Spark plug
22.Meter assembly
23.Neutral indicator light
24.Multi-function display
25.Speedometer
26.High beam indicator light
27.Turn signal indicator light
28.Speed sensor
29.Tail/brake light
30.Rear turn signal light (right)
31.Front turn signal light (right)
32.Front turn signal light (left)
33.Rear turn signal light (left)
34.Headlight
35.Rear brake light switch
36.Front brake light switch
37.Turn signal relay
38.Headlight relay
39.Horn
40.Left handlebar switch
41.Horn switch
42.Dimmer switch
43.Turn signal switch
44.Thermo switch
45.Carburetor warmer
Br
Brown
Ch
Chocolate
Dg
Dark green
G
Green
Gy
Gray
L
Blue
O
Orange
P
Pink
R
Red
Sb
Sky blue
W
White
Y
Yellow
B/G
Black/Green
B/L
Black/Blue
B/R
Black/Red
B/W
Black/White
B/Y
Black/Yellow
Br/G
Brown/Green
Br/L
Brown/Blue
Br/R
Brown/Red
Br/W
Brown/White
G/B
Green/Black
G/R
Green/Red
G/W
Green/White
G/Y
Green/Yellow
Gy/G
Gray/Green
Gy/R
Gray/Red
L/B
Blue/Black
L/R
Blue/Red
L/W
Blue/White
L/Y
Blue/Yellow
O/B
Orange/Black
P/W
Pink/White
R/B
Red/Black
R/G
Red/Green
R/L
Red/Blue
R/W
Red/White
R/Y
Red/Yellow
Sb/W
Sky blue/White
W/B
White/Black
W/R
White/Red
W/Y
White/Yellow
Y/B
Yellow/Black
Y/G
Yellow/Green
Y/L
Yellow/Blue
Y/R
Yellow/Red
YAMAHA MOTOR CO., LTD.
2500 SHINGAI IWATA SHIZUOKA JAPAN
PRINTED IN U.S.A.
W
W
W
W
W
W
W
R
(BLACK)
W/L W/R
(BLACK)
2
1
B
B
W
R
R R
W
W
W
B
B
B
B
%
B
B
B
B
P
Dg
$
Y Dg Ch
L/B Ch Br/W
B
B/Y
B/Y
B/Y
Br
R/W
Br
(BLACK)
R R
Br R/W
B
3
B/Y
B
4
7
5B
R
R
R
R
W
W
B/Y Br
B
6
W/L
W/R
W
W
W
R/W
Br
P
B
.
R/W
Br
8
Ch Dg
Y
G
R/W
B/W
B
G
v
B
B
Y G
Y
GY
Ch
B
c
L
N
R
B
Ch
L
L/B
L/B
L/W
L/W
B
L/B B/W
(GRAY)
Ch
B
(BLACK)
Dg
B
B
(BLACK)
B
(GRAY)
z
B
B B
n
;
Br
y
G/Y
(BLACK)
G/W
(BLACK)
Dg
L
L/B
L/W L/B
Ch
B
Dg
B
B
L/B
L/W
G/Y Br
e
L/W
B
Ch
Dg
Br
Br/W
B/W
x
Ch Dg
Br/W
Br/W
m
Br
t
r
w
q
R/W
OFF
ON
OFF
RUN
HI
LO
L/B
L/B
W/B
, Br Br
B/W L/W
B
B R/W
L/W R/W
0
(RED)
OFF
PUSH
Y
W/B
R
#
B B
Br
Br
L/B
Br
L/B L/Y
@
P
L/B
(RED)
Br/L
R
L/Y
!
P
Br
Br L/Y
L/B
B
Y
(BLACK)
ON
OFF
LOCK
9R
Br/W Ch L
Dg
/
R
2008 XT250X/XT250XC WIRING DIAGRAM
20A
Br
B
l
B
B
(BLACK)
Y L B
Y L
Y L
G/Y
Br
Lg
Br G/Y
Lg
Sb
u
k
(BROWN)
L/W
B/W
Lg
Br
W B
(BROWN)
B
b
Lg
B/W
L/W
W
B
Sb
B
W
B
W
B
Sb
Dg
Ch
Y
Br
R/G
W
B
Sb
Sb
Sb
Br
R/G B/W
R/L
B/W R/G
R/W R/L
s
i
Sb
W/R O
R/L W/L B
(BLACK)
W L/Y W/B
W W R/B
CARB. WARMER
B/Y
MAIN HARNESS
B/Y
(BLACK)
B
(BLACK)
A
W
B
Sb
W
Sb
B
W/B W/R
g
f
R/B
W/B
L/Y
W
W
W
W/L
W/R
B
W
Y Dg Ch
B
O
R/L
B/W
Sb
B
O
SPEED SENSOR
(GRAY)
Ch Dg Y
j
h
d
R/L
o
MAIN HARNESS
(GRAY)
B
B
Y
a
p
MAIN HARNESS
(BLACK)
L
C
Y
B
L
TAIL LIGHT
(BLACK)
(BLACK) (BLACK)
A
A
(BLACK)
OFF
PUSH
(BLACK)
ON
OFF
LOCK
2008 XT250X/XT250XC WIRING DIAGRAM
(RED)
HI
LO
(RED)
OFF
RUN
L
N
R
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
(GRAY)
(BLACK) (BLACK)
(GRAY)
OFF
ON
C C
C
(BLACK)
(BROWN)
(BROWN)
B
B
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
(BLACK)
(GRAY)
(BLACK)
TAIL LIGHT
(BLACK)
MAIN HARNESS
MAIN HARNESS SPEED SENSOR
C
(GRAY)
MAIN HARNESS CARB. WARMER
B
A